JP7478176B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to an amusement machine.

Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine that executes a big prize game in which a big prize lottery is held based on the entry of a gaming ball into a start hole, and if a big prize is won in the big prize lottery, the big prize hole is opened. In such gaming machines, multiple gaming states with different game progress conditions are provided, and it is common for the launch direction of the gaming ball and the area into which the gaming ball should enter to differ depending on the gaming state.

For example, Patent Document 1 discloses a gaming machine that has different types of starting slots and in which the reserved type, which is the actual subject of change, varies depending on the gaming state.

JP 2019-170744 A

To increase the interest of games, there is a demand for the development of new gameplay features that involve transitions in game state, but if it is difficult for players to understand that the game state has changed, there is a risk that the players will be disadvantaged.

The present invention aims to provide a gaming machine that can reduce the possibility of a player suffering a disadvantage.

In order to solve the above problems, the gaming machine of the present invention comprises a big prize opening provided in a gaming area, a prize opening provided in the gaming area separately from the big prize opening, game control means for progressing a game in accordance with a progress condition set for the state, state change means for terminating the second state when either a preset first end condition or a second end condition different from the first end condition is established in the second state, and effect execution means for executing a predetermined effect based on a game result during a predetermined period in association with the end of the second state , and the game control means controls a normal game and a second open game, including a process for executing a first lottery to determine whether a first open game can be executed, and a process for controlling opening and closing of the prize opening to execute the first open game when a winning is obtained in the first lottery. and if the second lottery is won, a special game including a process of controlling opening and closing of the large prize opening to execute the second opening game, wherein in the second state, the normal game is more advantageous to the player than in the first state, the first end condition can be established based on the execution of the normal game, the second end condition can be established based on the execution of the special game, at least a part of the predetermined presentation is common between the first end condition and the second end condition, a presentation time is shortened by the establishment of a preset presentation end condition, and the presentation end conditions include a presentation end condition common to the first end condition and the second end condition.

The present invention can reduce the possibility of players suffering disadvantages.

This is an oblique view of the gaming machine showing the door of the Type 1/Type 2 reference example in an open state. FIG. 2 is a front view of a type 1/type 2 gaming machine reference example. A diagram to explain the second large prize opening in the Type 1/Type 2 reference example. FIG. 2 is a block diagram of a gaming machine relating to a reference example of a type 1/type 2 game machine. 13 is an address map of a memory area used by a main CPU according to a type 1/type 2 reference example. This is a diagram explaining the special 1 jackpot determination random number judgment table for the Type 1/Type 2 reference example. This is a diagram explaining the special 2 jackpot determination random number judgment table for the Type 1/Type 2 reference example. A diagram explaining the winning pattern random number determination table for the Type 1/Type 2 reference example. A diagram explaining the reach group determination random number judgment table for the Type 1 Type 2 reference example. A figure explaining the reach mode determination random number judgment table for the Type 1 Type 2 reference example. A figure explaining the fluctuation pattern random number determination table for the Type 1, Type 2 reference example. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a variable time determination table for the Type 1/Type 2 reference example. This is a diagram explaining the first special electric feature operation ram set table for the Type 1 and Type 2 reference example. A diagram explaining the second special electric feature operation ram set table for the Type 1/Type 2 reference example. This is a diagram explaining the opening and closing manner of the second large prize opening in the Type 1/Type 2 reference example, and the opening and closing manner of a specific area by a movable member. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a game status setting table for setting the game status after the end of a major role game in the Type 1/Type 2 reference example. A diagram explaining the winning determination random number judgment table for the Type 1/Type 2 reference example. 1A is a diagram explaining a normal pattern change time data table for a type 1/2 reference example, and FIG. 1B is a diagram explaining an opening/closing control pattern table for a type 1/2 reference example. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating the gaming machine status flag relating to the Type 1/Type 2 reference example. 11 is a first flowchart illustrating a CPU initialization process in a main control board according to a type 1/type 2 reference example. 13 is a second flowchart illustrating the CPU initialization process in the main control board according to the first and second type reference example. 13 is a flowchart illustrating a sub-command group set process in a main control board according to the Type 1/Type 2 reference example. 13 is a flowchart illustrating the evacuation process during power outage in the main control board according to the type 1, type 2 reference example. 13 is a flowchart illustrating a timer interrupt process in a main control board according to a type 1, type 2 reference example. 13 is a flowchart illustrating setting-related processing in a main control board according to a type 1, type 2 reference example. 13 is a flowchart illustrating a switch management process in a main control board according to a type 1, type 2 reference example. 13 is a flowchart illustrating a gate passing process in a main control board according to a type 1, type 2 reference example. 13 is a flowchart explaining the first starting port passing process in the main control board for the Type 1/Type 2 reference example. 13 is a flowchart explaining the second starting port passing process in the main control board for the Type 1/Type 2 reference example. This is a flowchart explaining the special pattern random number acquisition process in the main control board for the Type 1/Type 2 reference example. 13 is a flowchart illustrating the acquisition time performance determination process in the main control board for the Type 1/Type 2 reference example. 13 is a flowchart illustrating a specific area passing process in a main control board according to a type 1, type 2 reference example. A diagram explaining the special game management phase relating to the Type 1/Type 2 reference example. 13 is a flowchart explaining the special game management processing in the main control board for the Type 1/Type 2 reference example. 13 is a flowchart explaining the special pattern change waiting process in the main control board for the Type 1/Type 2 reference example. 13 is a flowchart explaining the special pattern winning determination process in the main control board for the Type 1/Type 2 reference example. 13 is a flowchart explaining the special pattern variable number determination process in the main control board for the Type 1/Type 2 reference example. This is a flowchart explaining the processing during special pattern fluctuation in the main control board for the Type 1/Type 2 reference example. 13 is a flowchart explaining the special pattern stop pattern display processing in the main control board for the Type 1/Type 2 reference example. This is a flowchart explaining the processing before opening the large prize opening in the main control board for the Type 1/Type 2 reference example. This is a flowchart explaining the large prize opening/closing switching process in the main control board for the Type 1/Type 2 reference example. This is a flowchart explaining the large prize opening control process in the main control board for the Type 1/Type 2 reference example. This is a flowchart explaining the large prize opening closure activation process in the main control board for the Type 1/Type 2 reference example. This is a flowchart explaining the large prize opening end wait processing in the main control board for the Type 1/Type 2 reference example. A diagram explaining the normal game management phase relating to the Type 1/Type 2 reference example. 13 is a flowchart explaining the normal game management processing in the main control board for the Type 1/Type 2 reference example. This is a flowchart explaining the normal pattern change waiting process in the main control board for the Type 1/Type 2 reference example. This is a flowchart explaining the processing during normal pattern fluctuation in the main control board for the Type 1/Type 2 reference example. 13 is a flowchart explaining the normal pattern stop pattern display processing in the main control board for the Type 1/Type 2 reference example. This is a flowchart explaining the processing before opening the winning opening of a normal electric device in the main control board for the Type 1/Type 2 reference example. This is a flowchart explaining the normal electric gimmick prize opening/closing switching process in the main control board for the Type 1/Type 2 reference example. This is a flowchart explaining the control process for opening the winning opening of a normal electric device in the main control board for the Type 1/Type 2 reference example. This is a flowchart explaining the normal electric device winning opening closure validity processing in the main control board for the Type 1/Type 2 reference example. This is a flowchart explaining the waiting process for the end of the normal electric gimmick winning slot in the main control board for the Type 1/Type 2 reference example. This is a diagram illustrating an example of a variable presentation of a no-reach variable pattern related to a reference presentation example. This is a diagram illustrating an example of a normal reach fluctuation pattern fluctuation presentation related to a presentation reference example. This is a diagram illustrating an example of a change in the development reach change pattern when a miss occurs in accordance with a reference example of the performance. This is a diagram illustrating an example of a change presentation of a development reach change pattern at the time of a jackpot, which is related to a reference presentation example. This is a diagram illustrating an example of a variable presentation when the reach development presentation relating to the presentation reference example is executed twice. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of a pseudo-continuous reach fluctuation pattern fluctuation presentation relating to a presentation reference example. FIG. A diagram explaining a variable performance decision table related to a performance reference example. A figure explaining an example of a hold display presentation related to a reference presentation example. 1A is a diagram explaining a final hold display pattern determination table relating to a reference example of presentation, and FIG. 1B is a diagram explaining a previous hold display pattern determination table relating to a reference example of presentation. 13 is a flowchart explaining the sub-CPU initialization process in the sub-control board for the reference example performance. 13 is a flowchart explaining sub-timer interrupt processing in a sub-control board for a reference example of a performance. 13 is a flowchart explaining the pre-reading designation command reception processing in the sub-control board for the reference example performance. 13 is a flowchart explaining the variable command receiving processing in the sub-control board for the reference example performance. A diagram explaining a special jackpot determination random number judgment table for the embodiment. A diagram explaining a special jackpot determination random number judgment table for the embodiment. A diagram explaining a winning pattern random number determination table in the embodiment. A diagram explaining the first special electric feature operation ram set table in the embodiment. A diagram explaining the second special electric feature operation ram set table in the embodiment. 1A is a diagram for explaining a game status setting table 1 according to the embodiment, and FIG. 1B is a diagram for explaining a game status setting table 2 according to the embodiment. A figure explaining a winning determination random number judgment table in the embodiment. FIG. 1A is a diagram for explaining a normal pattern change time data table according to an embodiment, and FIG. 1B is a diagram for explaining an opening/closing control pattern table according to an embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating a game flow of the gaming machine according to the embodiment. 11 is a flowchart illustrating a sub-command group set process in the main control board according to the embodiment. 13 is a flowchart illustrating the special pattern change waiting process in the main control board in the embodiment. 13 is a flowchart illustrating a special symbol pattern determination process in a main control board according to an embodiment. 13 is a flowchart illustrating a special symbol stop symbol display process in a main control board according to an embodiment. 11 is a flowchart illustrating a number-of-times cutoff management process in a main control board according to an embodiment. 13 is a flowchart illustrating a specific failure state setting process in a main control board in the embodiment. A flowchart explaining the large prize opening end wait processing in the main control board in the embodiment. 10 is a flowchart illustrating a state setting process in a main control board according to the embodiment. 13 is a flowchart explaining the normal pattern change waiting process in the main control board in the embodiment. 13 is a flowchart explaining the processing during normal pattern fluctuation in the main control board in the embodiment. 13 is a flowchart illustrating the normal symbol stop symbol display processing in the main control board in the embodiment. 11A to 11C are diagrams illustrating an example of a rendering mode according to an embodiment of the present invention. 13A to 13C are diagrams illustrating an example of a variable presentation in normal mode according to an embodiment of the present invention. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of a change presentation in a chance mode according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 13A to 13C are diagrams illustrating an example of a variable performance in B mode according to an embodiment of the present invention. 11A to 11C are diagrams illustrating an example of an operation instruction presentation according to an embodiment. 11 is a time chart of the operation instruction presentation in the embodiment. 13 is a time chart of the final change in an advantageous state in a comparative example. 13 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between the game state and the variable time in the embodiment. FIG. 13 is a time chart of the final change in an advantageous state in the embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of a result display according to an embodiment. 13 is a time chart of a result display according to an embodiment of the present invention. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of a status change suggestion presentation according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 13 is a time chart of the result presentation at the time of an irregularity in the embodiment. A figure explaining an example of a state change suggestion display in an irregular event in the embodiment. 13 is a time chart of a state change suggestion effect in an irregular situation according to an embodiment of the present invention. A figure explaining an example of a presentation at an irregular time in a micro-time-saving game state in the embodiment. A figure explaining an example of a presentation at the time of an irregularity in an advantageous state in the embodiment. A figure explaining an example of a presentation when the power is turned off and then turned back on during the micro-time-saving game state in the embodiment. A figure explaining an example of a presentation when the power is turned off and then turned back on during an advantageous state in the embodiment. A figure explaining another example of the presentation when the power is turned off and then turned back on during an advantageous state in the embodiment. FIG. 11 is a first diagram illustrating a demo presentation according to the embodiment. FIG. 2 is a second diagram illustrating a demo presentation according to the embodiment. 11 is a flowchart illustrating a sub-timer interrupt process in a sub-control board in the embodiment. 13 is a flowchart explaining the performance control processing in the sub-control board in the embodiment. 11 is a flowchart illustrating the presentation mode control processing in the sub-control board in the embodiment. 13 is a flowchart explaining the result presentation control processing in the sub-control board in the embodiment. 13 is a flowchart illustrating the state change suggestion display control process in the sub-control board in the embodiment. 13 is a flowchart explaining the variable performance control processing in the sub-control board in the embodiment. 13 is a flowchart illustrating the process of canceling the waiting state for both passengers in the sub-control board according to the embodiment. 13 is a flowchart explaining the special customer waiting state release process in the sub-control board in the embodiment. 13 is a flowchart illustrating the process of canceling the regular passenger waiting state in the sub-control board in the embodiment. 13 is a flowchart illustrating a customer waiting state setting process in a sub-control board in the embodiment. 13 is a flowchart illustrating the demo performance control processing in the sub-control board in the embodiment.

The following describes in detail preferred embodiments of the present invention with reference to the attached drawings. The dimensions, materials, and other specific values shown in the embodiments are merely examples to facilitate understanding of the invention, and do not limit the present invention unless otherwise specified. In this specification and drawings, elements that have substantially the same functions and configurations are given the same reference numerals to avoid duplicated explanations, and elements that are not directly related to the present invention are not shown.

To facilitate understanding of the embodiment of the present invention, first, as a type-one/type-two reference example, the mechanical and electrical configurations of a so-called type-one/type-two mixed gaming machine, and the specific processing on each board will be explained. Next, as a performance reference example, specific performances that can be executed on a type-one/type-two mixed gaming machine and specific processing related to said performances will be explained. After that, as an embodiment of the present invention, a specific configuration that differs from the type-one/type-two reference example will be explained.

<Example of Type 1 and Type 2>
1 is a perspective view of a gaming machine 100 according to a type 1/type 2 reference example, showing the state in which the door is open. As shown in the figure, the gaming machine 100 is provided with an outer frame 102 having an enclosed space formed by four sides assembled in a substantially rectangular shape, a middle frame 104 attached to the outer frame 102 by a hinge mechanism so as to be freely opened and closed, and a front frame 106 attached to the middle frame 104 by a hinge mechanism so as to be freely opened and closed.

The middle frame 104, like the outer frame 102, has four sides arranged in a roughly rectangular shape to form an enclosed space, and the game board 108 is held in this enclosed space. The front frame 106 also holds a glass or resin transparent plate 110. When the middle frame 104 and the front frame 106 are closed against the outer frame 102, the game board 108 and the transparent plate 110 face each other roughly parallel, maintaining a predetermined distance between them, and the game board 108 can be seen through the transparent plate 110 from the front side of the gaming machine 100.

Figure 2 is a front view of a gaming machine 100 according to a type 1/type 2 reference example. As shown in this figure, an operating handle 112 that protrudes from the front side of the gaming machine 100 is provided at the bottom of the front frame 106. This operating handle 112 is provided so that it can be rotated by the player, and when the player rotates the operating handle 112 to perform a firing operation, a gaming ball is fired by a firing mechanism (not shown) with a strength according to the rotation angle of the operating handle 112. The gaming ball fired in this way rises between rails 114a, 114b provided on the gaming board 108 and is guided to the playing area 116.

The play area 116 is a space formed between the play board 108 and the transparent plate 110, and is an area in which the play balls can flow down or roll. The play board 108 is provided with numerous nails and windmills, and the play balls guided to the play area 116 collide with the nails and windmills, causing them to flow down and roll in irregular directions.

The play area 116 includes a first play area 116a and a second play area 116b, which have different degrees of entry of game balls depending on the launch strength of the launch mechanism. The first play area 116a is located on the left side of the play area 116 as seen by a player facing the gaming machine 100, and the second play area 116b is located on the right side of the play area 116 as seen by a player facing the gaming machine 100. Since the rails 114a and 114b are on the left side of the play area 116, game balls launched by the launch mechanism with a launch strength less than a predetermined strength will enter the first play area 116a, and game balls launched with a launch strength equal to or greater than the predetermined strength will enter the second play area 116b.

The game area 116 is also provided with a general winning hole 118, a first starting hole 120, and a second starting hole 122 through which game balls can enter. When a game ball enters the general winning hole 118, the first starting hole 120, or the second starting hole 122, a predetermined prize ball is paid out to the player. The number of prize balls may be any number greater than one, and the number of prize balls paid out from the general winning hole 118, the first starting hole 120, and the second starting hole 122 may be different or may be set to the same number of prize balls. In this case, it is also possible to set the number of prize balls paid out when a game ball enters the first starting hole 120 to be less than the number of prize balls paid out when a game ball enters the second starting hole 122.

As will be described in detail later, a first starting area is provided in the first starting hole 120, and a second starting area is provided in the second starting hole 122. When a game ball enters the first starting hole 120 or the second starting hole 122 and enters the first starting area or the second starting area, a lottery is held to determine one of a number of special patterns provided in advance. Each special pattern is associated with various game benefits, such as whether or not a big win game or a small win game that is advantageous to the player can be executed, and what kind of game state the game state will be from then on. Therefore, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 120 or the second starting hole 122, the player not only gets a predetermined prize ball, but also gets the opportunity to acquire the right to receive various game benefits.

The first starting hole 120 is located at the bottom of the game area 116, and is either capable of receiving only game balls flowing down the first game area 116a, or is located in a position where game balls that have entered the first game area 116a can enter more easily than game balls that have entered the second game area 116b.

The second starting port 122 is located in the second game area 116b, and only game balls flowing down the second game area 116b can enter, or is located in a position where game balls that have entered the second game area 116b can enter more easily than game balls that have entered the first game area 116a. This second starting port 122 is configured as a variable starting port (start variable winning device) having a movable piece 122b, and the ease of entry of game balls into the second starting port 122 is variable. Specifically, the second starting port 122 is provided with a movable piece 122b that can be opened and closed, and when this movable piece 122b is in a closed state, it is impossible or difficult for game balls to enter the second starting port 122. The specific configuration of the second starting hole 122 is not particularly limited, but here, the movable piece 122b is recessed into the rear side of the game board 108 in the closed state, and protrudes from the front side of the game board 108 in the open state.

In response to this, when a game ball passes through the gate 124 provided in the second game area 116b, it is determined whether or not to play an auxiliary game in which the second starting hole 122 is opened, and if it is determined that the auxiliary game is to be played, the auxiliary game in which the second starting hole 122 is controlled to open and close is played. More specifically, on the condition that the game ball has passed through the gate 124, a lottery for a normal symbol, which will be described later, is held, and if a winning symbol is selected in this lottery, the movable piece 122b is controlled to be in an open state for a predetermined time. In this way, when the movable piece 122b is in an open state, the movable piece 122b functions as a receptacle that guides the game ball to the second starting hole 122, making it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting hole 122.

Furthermore, a first large prize opening 126 and a second large prize opening 128 are provided at the bottom of the game area 116. The first large prize opening 126 and the second large prize opening 128 are arranged at positions where at least game balls flowing down the second game area 116b can enter. The first large prize opening 126 is provided with an openable/closable door 126b, and normally the openable/closable door 126b closes the first large prize opening 126, making it impossible for game balls to enter the first large prize opening 126. In contrast, when the aforementioned big prize game is executed, the openable/closable door 126b is opened and functions as a receptacle, making it possible for game balls to enter the first large prize opening 126. Then, when a game ball enters the first large prize opening 126, a predetermined prize ball is paid out to the player.

In addition, the second large prize opening 128 is provided with a movable piece 128b that can be opened and closed. Normally, the movable piece 128b closes the second large prize opening 128, making it impossible for game balls to enter the second large prize opening 128. In contrast, when the above-mentioned small prize game is played, the movable piece 128b is opened and functions as a tray, making it possible for game balls to enter the second large prize opening 128. When a game ball enters the second large prize opening 128, a predetermined prize ball is paid out to the player. The first large prize opening 126 and the second large prize opening 128 are also collectively referred to simply as the large prize opening. A large prize area is provided in the large prize opening, and when a game ball enters the large prize area, a predetermined prize ball is paid out. In other words, it can be said that the large prize area is opened and closed in the large prize game or the small prize game.

Figure 3 is a diagram for explaining the second large prize opening 128 in the Type 1/Type 2 reference example. A structure 129 that protrudes from the front side of the game board 108 is provided in the second game area 116b. This structure 129 has an opening formed in the upper part, which becomes the second large prize opening 128. A movable piece 128b is provided on the upper part of the structure 129, and normally, as shown in Figure 3(a), the movable piece 128b is maintained in a closed state that closes the second large prize opening 128.

The movable piece 128b protrudes into the game area 116 where game balls roll and flow down, facing above the game machine 100. Therefore, when the movable piece 128b is maintained in a closed state, game balls flowing down the game area 116 (second game area 116b) fall onto the movable piece 128b. Here, the movable piece 128b maintained in a closed state is inclined so that the left side of the game machine 100 is slightly lower than the right side. Therefore, when the movable piece 128b is in a closed state, the game balls that have fallen onto the movable piece 128b will slowly roll from right to left on the movable piece 128b, as shown by the arrow in FIG. 3(a).

When a small win game is executed, the movable piece 128b transitions to an open state that opens the second large winning hole 128. Here, the movable piece 128b, as shown in Figs. 3(a) and (b), is caused to protrude from a hole formed in the game board 108 in the front-rear direction of the game machine 100 by an actuator (solenoid) not shown. Normally, the actuator is kept in a non-energized state, and the movable piece 128b is held in a position protruding from the hole in the game board 108 to the front side, closing the second large winning hole 128. Then, when the actuator is energized, the movable piece 128b is held in a position retracted from the hole in the game board 108 to the rear side, as shown in Fig. 3(b), and the second large winning hole 128 is opened. In this way, when the second large winning hole 128 is open, a game ball enters the second large winning hole 128.

The second large prize opening 128 is provided with an outlet path 128d inside, and the second large prize opening 128 is inclined so that a game ball that enters the second large prize opening 128 is led to the outlet path 128d. The outlet path 128d is provided with a specific area 140b and a non-specific area 140c, which are holes through which the game ball can pass, and the game ball that enters the second large prize opening 128 is configured to pass through either the specific area 140b or the non-specific area 140c and be discharged to the back side of the game board 108.

The second big winning opening 128 is provided with a movable member 142 that opens and closes the specific area 140b and the non-specific area 140c. The movable member 142 can be switched between a state in which the game ball can enter the specific area 140b and a state in which the game ball cannot enter the specific area 140b by its movement (sliding). More specifically, when the movable member 142 is displaced to the position shown in FIG. 3(c), the non-specific area 140c is blocked by the movable member 142, and the game ball can pass through the specific area 140b. On the other hand, when the movable member 142 is displaced to the position shown in FIG. 3(d), the specific area 140b is blocked by the movable member 142, and the game ball can pass through the non-specific area 140c. As will be described in detail later, when the game ball enters the specific area 140b in the small winning game, a big win (a big win of two types) is obtained, and the big role game described above is started.

Returning to FIG. 2, at the bottom of the game area 116, there is an outlet 130 that discharges game balls that do not enter any of the general winning hole 118, the first starting hole 120, the second starting hole 122, the first large winning hole 126, and the second large winning hole 128 from the game area 116 to the back side of the game board 108.

The gaming machine 100 is equipped with a performance display device 200 consisting of a liquid crystal display device, a performance prop device 202 consisting of a movable device, a performance lighting device 204 consisting of lamps that can be controlled to various lighting modes and emission colors, a sound output device 206 consisting of a speaker, and a performance button 208 that accepts operation by the player, as performance devices that perform performances while the game is in progress.

The effect display device 200 is equipped with a main effect display section 200a and a sub-effect display section 201a, which are composed of an image display section that displays images. The main effect display section 200a is arranged in the approximate center of the game board 108 so that it can be seen from the front side of the gaming machine 100. As shown in the figure, the main effect display section 200a displays effect patterns 210a, 210b, and 210c in a variable manner, and a variable effect is executed in which the big role lottery result is notified to the player depending on the stopped display mode of each of these effect patterns 210a, 210b, and 210c. The sub-effect display section 201a is provided above the main effect display section 200a, and displays auxiliary effect images during the variable effect.

The special effects device 202 is located in front of the main effect display section 200a and is usually retracted to the rear side of the game board 108, but when the above-mentioned effect patterns 210a, 210b, and 210c are being displayed in a changing manner, it moves to the front of the main effect display section 200a, giving the player a sense of anticipation of a big win.

The lighting device 204 is provided on the prop device 202, the game board 108, etc., and is controlled to light up in various ways in accordance with the images displayed on the main display unit 200a.

The audio output device 206 is provided at the top of the front frame 106 or at the bottom of the outer frame 102, and outputs various sounds toward the front of the gaming machine 100 in accordance with the images displayed on the main performance display section 200a.

The effect button 208 is composed of a button that accepts pressing operations by the player, and is located in approximately the center of the gaming machine 100 in the width direction, and below the transparent plate 110. This effect button 208 is activated in accordance with the images displayed on the main effect display section 200a, and when a player's operation is accepted within the effective operation time, various effects are executed according to the operation.

The reference symbol 132 in the figure indicates an upper tray to which prize balls paid out from the gaming machine 100 and game balls loaned from the game ball loaning device are guided, and when this upper tray 132 is full of game balls, the game balls are guided to the lower tray 134. A ball ejection hole (not shown) is formed in the bottom surface of this lower tray 134 to eject game balls from the lower tray 134. This ball ejection hole is normally closed by an opening/closing plate (not shown), but by pushing in the ball ejection knob 134a, the opening/closing plate slides together with the ball ejection knob 134a, making it possible to eject game balls from the ball ejection hole to below the lower tray 134.

The game board 108 is provided with a first special symbol display 160, a second special symbol display 162, a first special symbol reserved display 164, a second special symbol reserved display 166, a normal symbol display 168, a normal symbol reserved display 170, and a right hit notification display 172, located outside the game area 116 and in a position visible to the player. Each of these displays 160-172 is a device for displaying various game-related situations, and will be described in detail below.

(Internal configuration of control means)
FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the internal configuration of the control means for controlling the progress of the game in the Type 1/Type 2 reference example.

The main control board 300 controls the basic operations of the game. This main control board 300 is equipped with a main CPU 300a, a main ROM 300b, and a main RAM 300c. The main CPU 300a reads out the programs stored in the main ROM 300b and performs arithmetic processing based on input signals from each detection switch and timer, and also directly controls each device and display, or sends commands to other boards depending on the results of the arithmetic processing. The main RAM 300c functions as a work area for data during arithmetic processing by the main CPU 300a.

The gaming machine 100 according to the Type 1/Type 2 reference example is broadly divided into a special game that is started when a gaming ball enters the first start hole 120 or the second start hole 122, and a normal game that is started when a gaming ball passes through the gate 124. The main ROM 300b of the main control board 300 stores various programs for progressing the special game and the normal game, as well as data and tables required for various games.

The main control board 300 is connected to a general winning hole detection switch 118s that detects when a game ball enters the general winning hole 118, a first starting hole detection switch 120s that detects when a game ball enters the first starting hole 120, a second starting hole detection switch 122s that detects when a game ball enters the second starting hole 122, a gate detection switch 124s that detects when a game ball passes through the gate 124, a first large winning hole detection switch 126s that detects when a game ball enters the first large winning hole 126, a second large winning hole detection switch 128s that detects when a game ball enters the second large winning hole 128, a specific area detection switch 140s that detects when a game ball enters the specific area 140b, and an out ball detection switch 130s that detects when a game ball is discharged from the game area 116. Detection signals are input from each of these detection switches to the main control board 300.

A junction passage is provided on the back of the game board 108, and game balls that enter the general winning hole 118, the first starting hole 120, the second starting hole 122, the first large winning hole 126, and the second large winning hole 128 join the game balls that are guided to the back side from the discharge hole 130 at the junction passage and are guided to the equipment of the game center. The out ball detection switch 130s is provided in the junction passage, and all game balls that are discharged from the game area 116, in other words, all game balls that are launched into the game area 116, are detected by the out ball detection switch 130s.

Also, the main control board 300 is connected to a normal electric device solenoid 122c that operates the movable piece 122b of the second starting hole 122, a first large winning hole solenoid 126c that operates the opening and closing door 126b that opens and closes the first large winning hole 126, a second large winning hole solenoid 128c that operates the movable piece 128b that opens and closes the second large winning hole 128, and a movable member drive solenoid 142c that moves the movable member 142 provided in the second large winning hole 128. The main control board 300 controls the opening and closing of the second starting hole 122, the first large winning hole 126, the second large winning hole 128, and the specific area 140b.

Furthermore, the first special pattern display 160, the second special pattern display 162, the first special pattern reserved display 164, the second special pattern reserved display 166, the normal pattern display 168, the normal pattern reserved display 170, and the right hit notification display 172 are connected to the main control board 300, and the display of each of these displays is controlled by the main control board 300.

The gaming machine 100 is also provided with multiple abnormality detection sensors 174 that detect possible abnormalities or fraud, such as a radio wave detection sensor that detects radio waves, a magnetic detection sensor that detects magnetism, and a door open sensor that detects the open state of the middle frame 104 or the front frame 106, and is configured so that an abnormality detection signal is input from each abnormality detection sensor 174 to the main control board 300.

Furthermore, a setting change switch 180s is provided on the back of the game board 108. The setting change switch 180s is configured to be accessible with a dedicated key. When the setting change switch 180s is turned on, it becomes possible to change and confirm the setting value. As will be described in detail later, the gaming machine 100 according to the Type 1/Type 2 Reference Example stores one of six setting values with different degrees of advantage in the setting value buffer as a registered setting value, and the game progresses according to the stored registered setting value.

A RAM clear button is provided on the back of the game board 108 so that it can be pressed, and pressing this RAM clear button is detected by the RAM clear switch 182s. The RAM clear switch 182s is connected to the main control board 300, and a RAM clear operation signal is input from the RAM clear switch 182s to the main control board 300. If a RAM clear operation signal is input from the RAM clear switch 182s when the power is turned on, the main CPU 300a clears the main RAM 300c.

In addition, a performance display monitor 184 is provided on the back of the game board 108. The main control board 300 displays the registered setting values and base ratios on the performance display monitor 184.

The main control board 300 is also connected to a dispensing control board 310 and a sub-control board 330.

The payout control board 310 controls the launching of game balls and the payout of prize balls. This payout control board 310 also has a CPU, ROM, and RAM, and is connected to the main control board 300 so that it can communicate in both directions. A game information output terminal board 312 is connected to this payout control board 310, and various information on the progress of the game output from the main control board 300 is output to the hall computer of the gaming facility via the payout control board 310 and the game information output terminal board 312.

The payout control board 310 is also connected to a payout motor 314 for paying out the game balls stored in the storage section to the player as prize balls. The payout control board 310 controls the payout motor 314 based on a payout number designation command sent from the main control board 300 to control it so that a specified number of prize balls are paid out to the player. At this time, the number of paid out game balls is detected by a payout ball count switch 316s, and it is possible to know whether the prize balls to be paid out have been paid out to the player.

The payout control board 310 is also connected to a tray full detection switch 318s that detects whether the lower tray 134 is full. This tray full detection switch 318s is provided in a passage that guides the game balls paid out as prize balls to the lower tray 134, and a game ball detection signal is input to the payout control board 310 each time a game ball passes through the passage.

When the lower tray 134 is filled to capacity with more than a predetermined amount of game balls, game balls become trapped in the passageway leading to the lower tray 134, and game ball detection signals are continuously input from the full tray detection switch 318s to the payout control board 310. If the game ball detection signals are continuously input for a predetermined period of time, the payout control board 310 determines that the lower tray 134 is full, and sends a full tray command to the main control board 300. On the other hand, if the continuous input of the game ball detection signals stops after sending the full tray command, it determines that the full tray state has been released, and sends a full tray release command to the main control board 300.

The payout control board 310 is also connected to a launch control circuit 320 for two-way communication. When the launch control circuit 320 receives launch control data from the payout control board 310, it authorizes launch. The launch control circuit 320 is connected to a touch sensor 112s provided on the operating handle 112, which detects when the player touches the operating handle 112, and an operating volume 112a, which detects the operating angle of the operating handle 112. When signals are input from the touch sensor 112s and the operating volume 112a, the launch control circuit 320 controls the energization of a launch solenoid 112c provided on the game ball launching device to launch the game ball.

The sub-control board 330 mainly controls each presentation during play, standby, etc. This sub-control board 330 is equipped with a sub-CPU 330a, a sub-ROM 330b, a sub-RAM 330c, and an RTC 330d, and is connected to the main control board 300 so that it can communicate in one direction from the main control board 300 to the sub-control board 330. The sub-CPU 330a reads out the programs stored in the sub-ROM 330b and performs calculations based on commands sent from the main control board 300 and input signals from a timer, and also controls the execution of the presentations. At this time, the sub-RAM 330c functions as a work area for data during calculation processing by the sub-CPU 330a.

Specifically, the sub-control board 330 performs image display control to display images on the main performance display unit 200a and the sub performance display unit 201a. The sub-ROM 330b stores a large number of different image data to be displayed on the main performance display unit 200a and the sub performance display unit 201a, and the sub-CPU 330a reads the image data from the sub-ROM 330b to a VRAM (not shown) and controls the image display on the main performance display unit 200a and the sub performance display unit 201a.

The sub-control board 330 also controls the movement of the props device 202 and the lighting of the lighting device 204, as well as controlling the audio output to output audio from the audio output device 206. Furthermore, when an operation detection signal is input from the performance button detection switch 208s, which detects that the performance button 208 has been pressed, a specific performance is executed.

A power supply board (not shown) is connected to each board, and power is supplied to each board from a commercial power source via the power supply board. The power supply board is also provided with a backup power supply consisting of a capacitor. The RTC 330d provided on the sub-control board 330 receives power from this backup power supply and keeps track of the current time.

Figure 5 is an address map of the memory area used by the main CPU 300a in the Type 1/Type 2 Reference Example. Note that in Figure 5, the addresses are shown in hexadecimal, with "H" indicating hexadecimal. As shown in Figure 5, the memory area used by the main CPU 300a includes the memory area (0000H-2FFFH) allocated to the main ROM 300b and the memory area (F000H-F3FFH) allocated to the main RAM 300c.

The memory area of the main ROM 300b is divided into a used area (0000H to 1A7AH) that stores programs and data for controlling the progress of the game, and a non-used area (2000H to 2BFFH) that stores programs and data for executing processes for performing tests stipulated by gaming machine regulations and processes for displaying the performance display monitor 184 (including processes for calculating the base ratio to be displayed on the performance display monitor 184).

The used area of the main ROM 300b includes a program area (0000H-0A89H) in which programs for controlling the progress of the game are stored, an unused area (0A8AH-0FFFH), and a data area (1000H-1A7AH) in which data other than programs are stored. Note that the used area does not necessarily have to include the unused area (0A8AH-0FFFH).

The unused area of the main ROM 300b includes a program area (2000H to 27FFH) that stores programs for executing processes for performing tests stipulated by gaming machine regulations and processes for displaying the performance display monitor 184, and a data area (2800H to 2BFFH) that stores data other than these programs.

In addition to the used area and unused area, the memory area of main ROM 300b also includes an unused area (1A7BH-1DFFH), a ROM comment area (1E00H-1EFFH) in which arbitrary data such as the program title and version is stored, an unused area (1F00H-1FFFH), an unused area (2C00H-2FBFH), and a program management area (2FC0H-2FFFH) in which information necessary for main CPU 300a to execute a program is stored.

The memory area of the main RAM 300c is divided into a used area (F000H to F1FFH) that is temporarily used when a program for controlling the progress of the game is being executed, and a non-used area (F210H to F228H) that is an area other than the used area and is temporarily used when a program for processing tests stipulated by the gaming machine regulations or processing for displaying the performance display monitor 184 is being executed.

The used area of the main RAM 300c includes a work area (F000H-F12AH) that is temporarily used when a program for controlling the progress of the game is being executed, an unused area (F12BH-F1D7H), and a stack area (F1D8H-F1FFH) where data is temporarily saved while a program for controlling the progress of the game is being executed. Note that the used area does not have to include the unused area (F12BH-F1D7H).

The unused area of the main RAM 300c includes a work area (F210H to F21FH) that is temporarily used when programs are being executed for processing tests stipulated by gaming machine regulations and processing for displaying the performance display monitor 184, and a stack area (F220H to F228H) that temporarily stores data when these programs are being executed.

In addition to the used area and unused area, the memory area of main RAM 300c also includes an unused area (F200H to F20FH) and an unused area (F229H to F3FFH).

In this way, main ROM 300b and main RAM 300c are provided with separate areas: a used area used to control the progress of the game, and a non-used area used to execute processes for performing tests stipulated by gaming machine regulations and processes for controlling the display of the performance display monitor 184.

The main RAM 300c has a 16-byte unused area (F200H-F20FH) between the used area and the unused area. This unused area (F200H-F20FH) is set as a boundary area that separates the used area and the unused area, making the boundary between the used area and the unused area clear, preventing the unused area from being used when a program for controlling the progress of the game is being executed, and preventing the used area from being used when a program for processing tests stipulated by the gaming machine regulations or processing for controlling the display of the performance display monitor 184 is being executed.

The unused area between the used area and the unused area only needs to be at least 1 byte, and from the viewpoint of preventing fraud, it is preferable that it be 4 bytes or more, and more preferably set to 16 bytes or more. Furthermore, writing and reading of data into the unused area is prohibited, but from the viewpoint of preventing fraud, it may be cleared at a specified time.

Next, we will explain how to play the gaming machine 100 according to the one type two type reference example, along with the various tables stored in the main ROM 300b.

As mentioned above, the gaming machine 100 according to the Type 1/Type 2 Reference Example has two types of games, special games and normal games, which proceed in parallel, and when these two games are played, the game proceeds in either a non-time-saving game state or a time-saving game state.

Details of each game state will be described later, but the non-time-saving game state is a game state in which the movable piece 122b is less likely to open and the game ball is less likely to enter the second starting hole 122, and the time-saving game state is a game state in which the movable piece 122b is more likely to open than in the non-time-saving game state and the game ball is more likely to enter the second starting hole 122. The initial state of the gaming machine 100 is set to the non-time-saving game state.

When the player operates the operating handle 112 to launch a game ball into the game area 116 and the game ball flowing down the game area 116 enters the first start port 120 or the second start port 122, a lottery (hereinafter referred to as the "big prize lottery") is held to determine whether or not the player will be awarded a game profit. If a big prize or small prize is won in this big prize lottery, the first big prize opening 126 and the second big prize opening 128 are opened and a big prize game or small prize game is executed in which the game ball can enter the first big prize opening 126 and the second big prize opening 128. In addition, the game state after the big prize game ends is set to one of the game states described above. The big prize lottery method is explained below.

As will be described in more detail later, when a game ball enters the first start hole 120 or the second start hole 122, various random number values related to the big role lottery (jackpot determining random number, winning symbol random number, reach group determining random number, reach mode determining random number, variable pattern random number) are obtained, and each of these random number values is stored in the special symbol reserve memory area of the main RAM 300c. In the following, the various random numbers stored in the special symbol reserve memory area when a game ball enters the first start hole 120 are collectively referred to as special 1 reserve, and the various random numbers stored in the special symbol reserve memory area when a game ball enters the second start hole 122 are collectively referred to as special 2 reserve.

The special chart reservation memory area of the main RAM 300c includes a first special chart reservation memory area and a second special chart reservation memory area. The first special chart reservation memory area and the second special chart reservation memory area each have four memory sections (first to fourth memory sections). When a game ball enters the first starting hole 120, the special 1 reservation is stored in order starting from the first memory section of the first special chart reservation memory area, and when a game ball enters the second starting hole 122, the special 2 reservation is stored in order starting from the first memory section of the second special chart reservation memory area.

For example, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 120, if no reservation is stored in any of the first to fourth memory sections of the first special chart reservation memory area, a special 1 reservation is stored in the first memory section. Also, for example, if a game ball enters the first starting hole 120 while a special 1 reservation is stored in the first to third memory sections, the special 1 reservation is stored in the fourth memory section. Also, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 122, similar to the above, a special 2 reservation is stored in the memory section with the smallest number (ordinal number) among the first to fourth memory sections of the second special chart reservation memory area where a special 2 reservation is not stored.

However, the number of special 1 reservations (X1) and the number of special 2 reservations (X2) that can be stored in the first special chart reservation memory area and the second special chart reservation memory area are each set to four. Therefore, for example, if four special 1 reservations are already stored in the first special chart reservation memory area when a game ball enters the first starting hole 120, no new special 1 reservations will be stored by the game ball entering the first starting hole 120. Similarly, if four special 2 reservations are already stored in the second special chart reservation memory area when a game ball enters the second starting hole 122, no new special 2 reservations will be stored by the game ball entering the second starting hole 122.

Figure 6 is a diagram explaining the special 1 jackpot determination random number judgment table for the Type 1/Type 2 reference example. When a game ball enters the first start hole 120 or the second start hole 122, one jackpot determination random number is obtained from the range of 0 to 65535. Then, when the big prize lottery starts, that is, according to the game state when the jackpot determination is made, a jackpot determination random number judgment table is selected, and the big prize lottery is performed using the selected jackpot determination random number judgment table and the obtained jackpot determination random number.

When starting the big prize lottery for the special 1 reserved, the special 1 big prize determination random number judgment table is referenced. Here, in the type 1 type 2 reference example, six setting values with different degrees of advantage are provided, and a special 1 big prize determination random number judgment table is provided for each setting value. During play, the setting value is set to one of the six levels, and the big prize lottery is performed by referring to the special 1 big prize determination random number judgment table corresponding to the currently set setting value (registered setting value stored in the setting value buffer).

When the setting value is set to 1 (registered setting value = 1), the big prize lottery is performed by referring to the special 1 jackpot determination random number judgment table a shown in Figure 6 (a). According to this special 1 jackpot determination random number judgment table a, if the jackpot determination random number is between 10001 and 10278, it is judged to be a jackpot, if the jackpot determination random number is between 20001 and 20655, it is judged to be a small jackpot, and if it is any other jackpot determination random number, it is judged to be a miss. Therefore, in this case, the probability of a jackpot is approximately 1/235.7, and the probability of a small jackpot is approximately 1/100.0.

When the setting value is set to 2 (registered setting value = 2), the big prize lottery is performed by referring to the special 1 jackpot determination random number judgment table b shown in Figure 6 (b). According to this special 1 jackpot determination random number judgment table b, if the jackpot determination random number is between 10001 and 10288, it is judged to be a jackpot, if the jackpot determination random number is between 20001 and 20655, it is judged to be a small jackpot, and if it is any other jackpot determination random number, it is judged to be a miss. Therefore, in this case, the probability of a jackpot is approximately 1/227.6, and the probability of a small jackpot is approximately 1/100.0.

When the setting value is set to 3 (registered setting value = 3), the big prize lottery is performed by referring to the special 1 jackpot determination random number judgment table c shown in Figure 6 (c). According to this special 1 jackpot determination random number judgment table c, if the jackpot determination random number is between 10001 and 10298, it is judged to be a jackpot, if the jackpot determination random number is between 20001 and 20655, it is judged to be a small jackpot, and if it is any other jackpot determination random number, it is judged to be a miss. Therefore, in this case, the probability of a jackpot is approximately 1/219.9, and the probability of a small jackpot is approximately 1/100.0.

When the setting value is set to 4 (registered setting value = 4), the big prize lottery is performed by referring to the special 1 jackpot determination random number judgment table d shown in Figure 6 (d). According to this special 1 jackpot determination random number judgment table d, if the jackpot determination random number is between 10001 and 10308, it is judged to be a jackpot, if the jackpot determination random number is between 20001 and 20655, it is judged to be a small jackpot, and if it is any other jackpot determination random number, it is judged to be a miss. Therefore, in this case, the probability of a jackpot is approximately 1/212.8, and the probability of a small jackpot is approximately 1/100.0.

When the setting value is set to 5 (registered setting value = 5), the big prize lottery is performed by referring to the special 1 jackpot determination random number judgment table e shown in Figure 6 (e). According to this special 1 jackpot determination random number judgment table e, if the jackpot determination random number is between 10001 and 10318, it is judged to be a jackpot, if the jackpot determination random number is between 20001 and 20655, it is judged to be a small jackpot, and if it is any other jackpot determination random number, it is judged to be a miss. Therefore, in this case, the probability of a jackpot is approximately 1/206.1, and the probability of a small jackpot is approximately 1/100.0.

When the setting value is set to 6 (registered setting value = 6), the big prize lottery is performed by referring to the special 1 jackpot determination random number judgment table f shown in Figure 6 (f). According to this special 1 jackpot determination random number judgment table f, if the jackpot determination random number is between 10001 and 10328, it is judged to be a jackpot, if the jackpot determination random number is between 20001 and 0655, it is judged to be a small jackpot, and if it is any other jackpot determination random number, it is judged to be a miss. Therefore, in this case, the probability of a jackpot is approximately 1/199.8, and the probability of a small jackpot is approximately 1/100.0.

Figure 7 is a diagram explaining the special 2 jackpot determination random number judgment table for the type 1 and type 2 reference example. When starting a big role lottery for special 2 reserve, the special 2 jackpot determination random number judgment table is referenced. The special 2 jackpot determination random number judgment table is also set for each setting value, just like the special 1 jackpot determination random number judgment table.

When the setting value is set to 1 (registered setting value = 1), the big prize lottery is performed by referring to the special 2 jackpot determination random number judgment table a shown in Figure 7 (a). According to this special 2 jackpot determination random number judgment table a, if the jackpot determination random number is between 10001 and 10278, it is judged to be a jackpot, if the jackpot determination random number is between 20001 and 28856, it is judged to be a small jackpot, and if it is any other jackpot determination random number, it is judged to be a miss. Therefore, in this case, the probability of a jackpot is approximately 1/235.7, and the probability of a small jackpot is approximately 1/7.4.

Similarly, when the setting value is set to 2 to 6 (registered setting value = 2 to 6), the big prize lottery is performed by referring to the special 2 jackpot determination random number judgment tables b to f shown in Figures 7 (b) to (f). According to these special 2 jackpot determination random number judgment tables b to f, a jackpot is determined when the jackpot determination random number is the value shown. Therefore, when the setting value is 2 to 6, the jackpot probability is approximately 1/227.6 to 1/199.8, respectively, and the small jackpot probability is approximately 1/7.4.

As described above, the big prize lottery is held according to the registered setting value. At this time, the probability of winning a big prize differs according to the registered setting value, and it is easier to win a big prize when the registered setting value is large than when it is small. Note that here, even if the registered setting value differs, the probability of winning a small prize does not change, but the probability of winning a small prize may be different for each registered setting value. Also, a small prize is not required, and only either a big prize or a miss may be determined in the big prize lottery.

Figure 8 is a diagram explaining the winning symbol random number judgment table for the Type 1 and Type 2 reference example. When a game ball enters the first starting hole 120 or the second starting hole 122, one winning symbol random number is obtained within the range of 0 to 99. Then, when the judgment result of "big win" or "small win" is derived by the above-mentioned big role lottery, the type of special symbol is determined by the obtained winning symbol random number and the winning symbol random number judgment table. At this time, if a "big win" is won by the special 1 reservation, the special 1 winning symbol random number judgment table a is selected as shown in Figure 8 (a), and if a "small win" is won by the special 1 reservation, the special 1 winning symbol random number judgment table b is selected as shown in Figure 8 (b). In addition, if a "big win" is won by the special 2 reservation, the special 2 winning pattern random number determination table a is selected as shown in FIG. 8(c), and if a "small win" is won by the special 2 reservation, the special 2 winning pattern random number determination table b is selected as shown in FIG. 8(d). In the following, the special pattern determined by the winning pattern random number, that is, the special pattern determined when a big win is determined, is called the big win pattern, the special pattern determined when a small win is determined, is called the small win pattern, and the special pattern determined when a loss is determined, is called the loss pattern.

According to the special 1 winning symbol random number determination table a shown in FIG. 8(a) and the special 2 winning symbol random number determination table a shown in FIG. 8(c), the type of special symbol (big winning symbol) is determined according to the value of the obtained winning symbol random number, as shown in the figure. Also, according to the special 1 winning symbol random number determination table b shown in FIG. 8(b) and the special 2 winning symbol random number determination table b shown in FIG. 8(d), the type of special symbol (small winning symbol) is determined according to the value of the obtained winning symbol random number, as shown in the figure.

On the other hand, if the result of the big prize lottery is a "miss" and the lottery result is derived by the special 1 reservation, the special symbol X is determined as the losing symbol without drawing a lottery. Also, if the result of the big prize lottery is a "miss" and the lottery result is derived by the special 2 reservation, the special symbol Y is determined as the losing symbol without drawing a lottery.

In other words, the winning symbol random number determination table is referenced only when the result of the big prize lottery is a "big prize" or a "small prize", and is not referenced when the result of the big prize lottery is a "miss". Note that, here, the same big prize symbol is determined in the special 1 winning symbol random number determination table and the special 2 winning symbol random number determination table. However, different big prize symbols may be determined in both tables, and the type of special symbol (big prize symbol) may be determined by referring to the winning symbol random number determination table 1 regardless of the reserved type.

Note that here, the selection ratio of the big win symbol and the small win symbol is the same for all setting values, but either or both of the big win symbol and the small win symbol may be different for each setting value.

Figure 9 is a diagram explaining the reach group determination random number judgment table for the type 1 type 2 reference example. A plurality of reach group determination random number judgment tables are provided, and a preset table is selected according to the reserved type, reserved number, game state, and the variable state associated with the game state. When a game ball enters the first start hole 120 or the second start hole 122, one reach group determination random number is obtained from the range of 0 to 10006. As described above, when the big role lottery result is derived, a process is performed to determine the variable performance pattern (variation mode number, variable pattern number) that notifies the big role lottery result. In the type 1 type 2 reference example, when the big role lottery result is "miss", in determining the variable performance pattern, first, the group type is determined by the reach group determination random number and the reach group determination random number judgment table. Note that the variable state is a concept that specifies which table is to be referenced to determine the variable performance pattern, and is set separately from the game state.

For example, when the game state is set to a non-time-saving game state, if a "miss" big role lottery result is derived based on the special 1 reservation, and the number of reserved special 1s (hereinafter simply referred to as the "reserved number") at the time of the big role lottery is 0, the reach group determination random number judgment table 1 is selected as shown in FIG. 9(a). Similarly, when the game state is set to a non-time-saving game state, if a "miss" big role lottery result is derived based on the special 1 reservation, and the number of reserved special roles at the time of the big role lottery is 1, the reach group determination random number judgment table 2 is selected as shown in FIG. 9(b), and if the number of reserved special roles is 2 to 3, the reach group determination random number judgment table 3 is selected as shown in FIG. 9(c). In FIG. 9, the group x written in the group type column indicates an arbitrary group number. Therefore, various group numbers are determined as the group type depending on the acquired reach group determination random number and the type of reach group determination random number judgment table to be referenced.

Note that, here, we have explained the reach group determination random number judgment table that is referenced when a "miss" major role lottery result is derived based on the special 1 reserved in a non-time-saving game state, but many other reach group determination random number judgment tables are stored in the main ROM 300b.

If the result of the big prize lottery is a "big prize" or a "small prize", the group type is not determined when deciding the variable presentation pattern. In other words, the reach group determination random number judgment table is only referenced when the result of the big prize lottery is a "miss", and is not referenced when the result of the big prize lottery is a "big prize" or a "small prize".

Figure 10 is a diagram explaining the reach mode determination random number judgment table for the Type 1 and Type 2 reference example. This reach mode determination random number judgment table is broadly divided into a miss reach mode determination random number judgment table that is selected when the big role lottery result is a "miss", a big win reach mode determination random number judgment table that is selected when the big role lottery result is a "big win", and a small win reach mode determination random number judgment table that is selected when the big role lottery result is a "small win". The miss reach mode determination random number judgment table is provided for each group type determined as above, and the big win reach mode determination random number judgment table and the small win reach mode determination random number judgment table are provided for each reserved type.

In addition, each reach mode determination random number judgment table is also provided for each game state and type of pattern. Here, an example of a reach mode determination random number judgment table for group x when it is a miss, which is referenced in a specific game state and type of pattern, is shown in FIG. 10(a), an example of a reach mode determination random number judgment table for a special 1 big win is shown in FIG. 10(b), an example of a reach mode determination random number judgment table for a special 2 big win is shown in FIG. 10(c), an example of a reach mode determination random number judgment table for a special 1 small win is shown in FIG. 10(d), and an example of a reach mode determination random number judgment table for a special 2 small win is shown in FIG. 10(e).

When a game ball enters the first start hole 120 or the second start hole 122, one reach mode determination random number is obtained from the range of 0 to 250. If the result of the big role lottery is a "miss," as shown in FIG. 10(a), a reach mode determination random number judgment table at the time of a miss corresponding to the group type determined by the above group type lottery is selected, and a variable mode number is determined based on the selected reach mode determination random number judgment table at the time of a miss and the reach mode determination random number. If the result of the big role lottery is a "jackpot," as shown in FIG. 10(b) and (c), a reach mode determination random number judgment table at the time of a jackpot corresponding to the read-out reserve type is selected, and a variable mode number is determined based on the selected reach mode determination random number judgment table at the time of a jackpot and the reach mode determination random number.

Furthermore, if the result of the big prize lottery is a "small prize," as shown in Figures 10(d) and (e), a random number judgment table for determining the reach mode at the time of a small prize corresponding to the read-out hold type is selected, and a variable mode number is determined based on the selected random number judgment table for determining the reach mode at the time of a small prize and the reach mode determination random number.

In addition, in each reach mode determination random number judgment table, the reach mode determination random number is associated with a fluctuation pattern random number judgment table described later along with the fluctuation mode number, and the fluctuation pattern random number judgment table is determined at the same time as the fluctuation mode number is determined. In FIG. 10, the table x written in the fluctuation pattern random number judgment table column indicates an arbitrary table number. Therefore, the fluctuation mode number and the table number of the fluctuation pattern random number judgment table are determined according to the acquired reach group determination random number and the type of reach mode determination random number judgment table to be referenced. In addition, in the Type 1 and Type 2 reference examples, the fluctuation mode number and the fluctuation pattern number described later are set in hexadecimal. In the following, "H" is added to indicate hexadecimal numbers, but ○○H written in FIG. 10 to FIG. 12 indicates an arbitrary value expressed in hexadecimal numbers.

As described above, if the result of the big role lottery is a "miss," the group type is first determined by the reach group determination random number judgment table and reach group determination random number shown in Figure 9. Then, depending on the determined group type and game status, the fluctuation mode number and fluctuation pattern random number judgment table are determined by the reach mode determination random number judgment table at the time of a miss and the reach mode determination random number shown in Figure 10 (a).

On the other hand, if the result of the big prize lottery is a "big win" or a "small win," the system will refer to the big win reach mode determination random number judgment table shown in Figure 10, which corresponds to the determined big win or small win pattern (type of special pattern), the game state when the big win or small win is won, and use the reach mode determination random number to determine the fluctuation mode number and fluctuation pattern random number judgment table.

Figure 11 is a diagram explaining the fluctuation pattern random number determination table for the Type 1/Type 2 reference example. Here, the fluctuation pattern random number determination table x for a specific table number x is shown, but in addition to this, many other fluctuation pattern random number determination tables are provided for each table number.

When a game ball enters the first starting hole 120 or the second starting hole 122, one fluctuation pattern random number is obtained from the range of 0 to 238. Then, based on the fluctuation pattern random number determination table determined at the same time as the above fluctuation mode number and the obtained fluctuation pattern random number, the fluctuation pattern number is determined as shown in the figure.

In this way, when the big prize lottery is held, the change mode number and change pattern number are determined according to the big prize lottery result, the determined symbol type, the game status, the number of reserved balls, the reserved ball type, etc. These change mode numbers and change pattern numbers specify the change presentation pattern, and each of them is associated with the mode and time of the change presentation.

Figure 12 is a diagram explaining the fluctuation time determination table for the Type 1/Type 2 reference example. As described above, when the fluctuation mode number is determined, fluctuation time 1 is determined according to the fluctuation time 1 determination table shown in Figure 12 (a). According to this fluctuation time 1 determination table, fluctuation time 1 is associated with each fluctuation mode number, and the corresponding fluctuation time 1 is determined according to the determined fluctuation mode number.

Furthermore, as described above, once the fluctuation pattern number is determined, fluctuation time 2 is determined according to the fluctuation time 2 determination table shown in FIG. 12(b). According to this fluctuation time 2 determination table, a fluctuation time 2 is associated with each fluctuation pattern number, and the corresponding fluctuation time 2 is determined according to the determined fluctuation pattern number. The total time of fluctuation times 1 and 2 determined in this way is the time of the fluctuation performance that notifies the result of the big role lottery, i.e., the fluctuation time.

When the fluctuation mode number is determined in the above manner, a fluctuation mode command corresponding to the determined fluctuation mode number is sent to the sub-control board 330, and when the fluctuation pattern number is determined, a fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern number is sent to the sub-control board 330. In the sub-control board 330, the first half of the fluctuation performance is mainly determined based on the received fluctuation mode command, and the second half of the fluctuation performance is mainly determined based on the received fluctuation pattern command, but details will be described later. Note that below, the fluctuation mode number and the fluctuation pattern number may be collectively referred to as fluctuation information, and the fluctuation mode command and the fluctuation pattern command may be collectively referred to as fluctuation command.

Figure 13 is a diagram explaining the first special electric role operation ram set table according to the first type two type reference example, and Figure 14 is a diagram explaining the second special electric role operation ram set table according to the first type two type reference example. The first special electric role operation ram set table and the second special electric role operation ram set table are stored with various data for controlling the big role game or the small win game, and during the big role game and the small win game, the first big prize opening solenoid 126c and the second big prize opening solenoid 128c are controlled to be energized by referring to the first special electric role operation ram set table or the second special electric role operation ram set table. Hereinafter, the first special electric role operation ram set table and the second special electric role operation ram set table are collectively referred to simply as the special electric role operation ram set table. In reality, there are multiple special electric device activation ram set tables for each type of special symbol (big win symbol and small win symbol), and depending on the type of special symbol determined, the corresponding table is set at the start of the big win game or small win game, but here, for the sake of explanation, the control data for all special symbols is shown in one table.

When the special patterns A, B, and C, which are the big win patterns, are determined, an opening/closing process is executed to control the opening/closing of the first big win opening 126 in a predetermined opening/closing pattern, with reference to the first special electric role activation ram set table, as shown in FIG. 13. Also, when the special patterns a, b, and c, which are the small win patterns, are determined, an opening/closing process is executed to control the opening/closing of the first big win opening 126 and the second big win opening 128 in a predetermined opening/closing pattern, with reference to the second special electric role activation ram set table, as shown in FIG. 14. The big win game is composed of multiple rounds of play in which the first big win opening 126 is opened and closed a predetermined number of times, and the small win game is played only once in which the second big win opening 128 is opened and closed a predetermined number of times.

According to the special electric device operation ram set table, the opening time (waiting time until the first round of play begins), the maximum number of times the special electric device is operated (the number of rounds of play executed during one big prize play or one small prize play), the number of open large prize winning holes (the first large prize winning hole 126 and the second large prize winning hole 128 that are opened in each round of play), the number of times the special electric device is opened and closed (the number of times the first large prize winning hole 126 and the second large prize winning hole 128 are opened during one round of play), the solenoid energization time (the first large prize winning hole solenoid 126c and the second large prize winning hole solenoid 126c for each number of times the first large prize winning hole 126 and the second large prize winning hole 128 are opened), The power supply time of the prize port solenoid 128c, i.e., the opening time of the first large prize port 126 and the second large prize port 128 in one play), the specified number (the maximum number of wins that can be won through the first large prize port 126 and the second large prize port 128 in one round of play), the effective time for closing the large prize port (the closing time of the first large prize port 126 and the second large prize port 128 between rounds of play, i.e., the interval time between rounds), and the ending time (the waiting time from the end of the last round of play until the normal special play is resumed) are pre-stored as control data for the big prize game for each type of big prize pattern as shown in the figure.

In the Type 1/Type 2 reference example, if the special symbol A, which is the jackpot symbol, is selected, a big prize game consisting of four rounds of play is played, and if special symbols B or C are selected, a big prize game consisting of 15 rounds of play is played. Each round of play ends when the specified number (7 balls) of game balls enter the first big prize opening 126 or when a specified time (29.0 seconds) has passed since the first big prize opening 126 was opened.

Also, as shown in FIG. 14, when the special symbols a, b, and c, which are the small prize symbols, are determined, a small prize game consisting of one round of play is first played. In this small prize game, the second large prize opening 128 is repeatedly opened and closed. In the small prize game in which the special symbol a is determined and played, the second large prize opening 128 is opened only once for 0.1 seconds. In the small prize game in which the special symbols b and c are determined and played, the second large prize opening 128 is controlled to open and close in the following order: 0.1 second open (open 1), 3.0 second closed (close 1), 0.1 second open (open 2), 1.0 second closed (close 2), 0.1 second open (open 3), 1.0 second closed (close 3), and 0.1 second open (open 4).

Here, a specific area 140b and a non-specific area 140c are provided inside the second large prize opening 128, and a game ball that enters the second large prize opening 128 always enters either the specific area 140b or the non-specific area 140c. Then, in the small prize game, if the game ball that enters the second large prize opening 128 enters the specific area 140b, a large prize game is executed following the small prize game, in which the first large prize opening 126 is opened.

At this time, if the special symbols a and b, which are the small win symbols, are determined, four rounds of play are played in which the first large prize opening 126 is opened 29.0 seconds x 1 time. Also, if the special symbol c, which is the small win symbol, is determined, 15 rounds of play are played in the large prize game.

Figure 15 is a diagram illustrating the opening and closing mode of the second large prize winning opening 128 and the opening and closing mode of the specific area 140b by the movable member 142 in the type 1 type 2 reference example. As shown in Figure 15, in a small prize game in which the second large prize winning opening 128 is opened, the movable member 142 opens the specific area 140b for a moment (about 0.1 seconds) at the same time as the second large prize winning opening 128 is opened, and then maintains the specific area 140b in a closed state for a predetermined time, and then maintains the specific area 140b in an open state again. Then, as shown in Figure 15 (a), when the special pattern a is determined and a small prize game is executed, the second large prize winning opening 128 is opened only for 0.1 seconds from the start of the small prize game (round game). During this time, it takes a predetermined time for the game ball that entered the second large prize winning opening 128 to reach the specific area 140b. Therefore, when the game ball that entered the second large winning port 128 reaches the specific area 140b, the specific area 140b is always closed. As a result, when the special symbol a is determined and a small winning game is executed, the game ball will not enter the specific area 140b.

In addition, if an unforeseen event occurs, such as the game ball getting stuck in the second large winning opening 128, or the game ball getting stuck in the second large winning opening 128 for a long time for some reason, the game ball may enter the specific area 140b even in a small winning game in which the special symbol a is determined and executed. Therefore, in this specification, for ease of understanding, the words "always" and "certainly" are used, but this is based on the assumption that the state of the gaming machine 100 is appropriate for playing the game and that no unforeseen event has occurred, and does not mean a physical 100%.

In contrast, as shown in FIG. 15(b), when the special symbols b and c are determined and the small prize game is executed, the second large prize opening 128 is opened a total of four times in the small prize game. Therefore, the game ball that enters the second large prize opening 128 at the same time as the first opening of the second large prize opening 128 may not be able to enter the specific area 140b, but the game ball that enters the second large prize opening 128 at the second or subsequent openings of the second large prize opening 128 can reliably enter the specific area 140b. Although a detailed explanation is omitted, a structure that decelerates the game ball rolling on the second large prize opening 128 is provided above the second large prize opening 128, and the game ball is configured to always enter the specific area 140b if it is launched appropriately into the second game area 116b from the start of the small prize game.

Figure 16 is a diagram illustrating a game state setting table for setting the game state after the end of the big role game in the Type 1/Type 2 Reference Example. In the Type 1/Type 2 Reference Example, when the big role game is executed, the game state after the end of the big role game is set according to the type of special symbol that was determined. According to this game state setting table, regardless of whether the special symbol A, B, C, a, b, or c is determined, the game state is set to the time-saving game state after the end of the big role game.

When the game state is set to the time-saving game state, the number of times the time-saving game state continues (hereinafter referred to as the "time-saving number of times") is set. Here, when the special symbols A and a are selected, the time-saving number of times is set to 1, and when the special symbols B, C, b, and c are selected, the time-saving number of times is set to 7. This means that the time-saving game state continues until the big prize lottery result is confirmed 1 or 7 times. However, the above-mentioned number of time-saving times indicates the maximum number of times that the time-saving game state can continue in 1 time-saving game state, and if a big prize is won before the above-mentioned number of times of continuation is reached, the game state and the number of time-saving times will be set again. Therefore, when the time-saving game state is set after the end of the big prize game, if the lottery result of a big prize is not derived in the time-saving game state and a lottery result of a miss or a small prize is derived 1 or 7 times, the game state will be changed to a non-time-saving game state.

Here, in the time-saving play state, the remaining number of times the time-saving play is performed is subtracted each time the result of the big role lottery is finalized, and when the remaining number of times the time-saving play reaches 0, the play state changes to a non-time-saving play state. At this time, the number of times the time-saving play is performed is subtracted only when the result of the big role lottery based on the special 2 reservation is finalized. In other words, after playing a big role, when the result of the big role lottery based on the special 2 reservation has been finalized 1 or 7 times, the remaining number of times the time-saving play is reduced to 0, and the play state changes to a non-time-saving play state.

Here, when the time-saving game state is set, the number of time-saving times is varied depending on the type of special symbol, but the number of time-saving times may be set to the same regardless of the type of special symbol. Also, here, the number of time-saving times is deducted only when the result of the big role lottery based on the special 2 reserved is confirmed, but the number of time-saving times may also be deducted when the result of the big role lottery based on the special 1 reserved is confirmed.

Figure 17 is a diagram explaining the winning decision random number judgment table for the Type 1/Type 2 reference example. When the game ball flowing down the game area 116 passes through the gate 124, a normal symbol judgment process (hereinafter referred to as "normal symbol lottery") is performed, which is associated with whether or not to control the flow of electricity to the movable piece 122b of the second starting hole 122.

As will be described in more detail later, when the gaming ball passes through gate 124, one winning determination random number within the range of 0 to 99 is obtained, and this random number value is stored in the general map reserve memory area of main RAM 300c, up to a maximum of four. In other words, the general map reserve memory area has four memory sections for saving winning determination random numbers. Therefore, if a gaming ball passes through gate 124 with winning determination random numbers stored in all four memory sections of the general map reserve memory area, no winning determination random number will be stored based on the passage of the gaming ball. In the following, the winning determination random number stored in the general map reserve memory area after the gaming ball passes through gate 124 will be referred to as the general map reserve.

When starting the normal symbol lottery in the non-time-saving play state, the winning symbol determination random number judgment table for the non-time-saving play state is referenced, as shown in FIG. 17(a). According to this winning symbol determination random number judgment table for the non-time-saving play state, if the winning symbol determination random number is 0, a winning symbol is determined as the type of normal symbol, and if the winning symbol determination random number is 1 to 99, a losing symbol is determined as the type of normal symbol. Therefore, the probability of a winning symbol being determined in the non-time-saving play state, i.e., the probability of winning, is 1/100. As will be described in more detail later, when a winning symbol is determined in this normal symbol lottery, the second starting hole 122 is controlled to the open state, and when a losing symbol is determined, the second starting hole 122 is maintained in the closed state.

In addition, when starting the regular symbol lottery in the time-saving play state, the time-saving play state win determination random number judgment table is referenced, as shown in FIG. 17(b). According to this time-saving play state win determination random number judgment table, if the win determination random number is 0-98, a winning symbol is determined as the type of regular symbol, and if the win determination random number is 99, a losing symbol is determined as the type of regular symbol. Therefore, the probability of a winning symbol being determined in the time-saving play state, i.e., the probability of winning, is 99/100.

18(a) is a diagram explaining the normal pattern change time data table for the type 1 and type 2 reference example, and FIG. 18(b) is a diagram explaining the opening and closing control pattern table for the type 1 and type 2 reference example. As described above, when the normal pattern lottery is performed, the change time of the normal pattern is determined. The normal pattern change time data table is referenced when determining the change time of the normal pattern when a winning pattern or a losing pattern is determined by the normal pattern lottery. According to this normal pattern change time data table, when the game state is set to a non-time-saving game state, the change time is determined to be 10 seconds, and when the game state is set to a time-saving game state, the change time is determined to be 1 second. When the change time is determined in this way, the normal pattern display 168 is displayed (blinking) for the determined time. Then, when a winning pattern is determined, the normal pattern display 168 is turned on, and when a losing pattern is determined, the normal pattern display 168 is turned off.

When the winning symbol is determined by the normal symbol lottery and the normal symbol display 168 is lit, the movable piece 122b of the second starting hole 122 is controlled to energize by referring to the opening/closing control pattern table, as shown in FIG. 18(b). Note that in reality, an opening/closing control pattern table is provided for each game state, and depending on the game state when the normal symbol is determined, the corresponding table is set when the normal electric role solenoid 122c starts to energize, but here, for the sake of explanation, the control data corresponding to each game state is shown in one table.

Once the winning pattern is determined, the second starting hole 122 is controlled to open and close by referring to the opening and closing control pattern table, as shown in Figure 18 (b). According to this opening/closing control pattern table, the time before normal power is released (waiting time until the second start port 122 starts to open), the maximum number of times the normal electric role is switched to open or closed (the number of times the second start port 122 is opened), the solenoid energization time (the energization time of the normal electric role solenoid 122c for each number of times the second start port 122 is opened, i.e., the opening time of the second start port 122 once), the specified number (the maximum number of winnings that can be won in the second start port 122 during the entire opening of the second start port 122), the normal power closing effective time (the closing time between each opening of the second start port 122, i.e., the pause time), the normal power effective state time (waiting time from the end of the last opening of the second start port 122), and the normal power end wait time (waiting time until the variable display of the normal pattern described later is resumed after the normal power effective state time has elapsed) are stored in advance for each game state as control data for the second start port 122, as shown in the figure.

In this way, the non-time-saving game state and the time-saving game state are each associated with an opening/closing control condition for opening and closing the second start port 122 as a game progress condition, and in the time-saving game state, it is easier for the game ball to enter the second start port 122 than in the non-time-saving game state. In other words, in the time-saving game state, as long as the game ball passes through the gate 124, regular lotteries are held one after another, and the second start port 122 is frequently opened, so the player can hold big role lotteries while reducing the consumption of game balls.

The opening and closing conditions of the second start port 122 prescribe three elements: the probability of winning the normal pattern, the time for the variable display of the normal pattern, and the opening time of the second start port 122. In the Type 1 Type 2 reference example, two of these elements are set to be more favorable for the time-saving game state than for the non-time-saving game state, so that the game ball is more likely to enter the second start port 122 in the time-saving game state than in the non-time-saving game state. However, one or three of the above three elements may be set to be more favorable for the time-saving game state than the non-time-saving game state. In any case, it is sufficient to make the time-saving game state more favorable than the non-time-saving game state in at least one element, so that the game ball can enter the second start port 122 more easily overall in the time-saving game state than in the non-time-saving game state. In other words, when the game state is set to a non-time-saving game state, the movable piece 122b is controlled to open and close according to a first condition, and when the game state is set to a time-saving game state, the movable piece 122b is controlled to open and close according to a second condition that is more likely to open than the first condition.

Next, we will explain the main processing of the main control board 300 as the game progresses on the gaming machine 100.

Figure 19 is a diagram explaining the gaming machine status flag for the Type 1/Type 2 reference example. In the main control board 300, the gaming machine status flag manages whether or not the game can proceed. The gaming machine status flag is set to one of six flag values from 00H to 05H. A gaming machine status flag value of 00H indicates a playable state, and when the gaming machine status flag is 00H, the game is controlled to proceed, and when the gaming machine status flag is other than 00H, the game is stopped.

The flag value of the gaming machine status flag = 01H indicates a setting change state, and when the gaming machine status flag is 01H, the registered setting value can be changed. The flag value of the gaming machine status flag = 02H indicates a setting confirmation state, and when the gaming machine status flag is 02H, the registered setting value can be confirmed by displaying it on the performance display monitor 184, for example. The flag value of the gaming machine status flag = 03H indicates a setting abnormal state, and when the gaming machine status flag is 03H, the registered setting value is considered abnormal and play is stopped. The flag value of the gaming machine status flag = 04H indicates a RAM abnormal state, and when the gaming machine status flag is 04H, play is stopped. The flag value of the gaming machine status flag = 05H indicates a checksum abnormal state, and when the gaming machine status flag is 05H, play is stopped. When the power is turned on, the gaming machine status flag is set to one of the flag values, and processing according to the gaming machine status flag is performed.

(CPU Initialization Processing of Main Control Board 300)
FIG. 20 is a first flowchart explaining the CPU initialization processing in the main control board 300 relating to the Type 1/Type 2 reference example, and FIG. 21 is a second flowchart explaining the CPU initialization processing in the main control board 300 relating to the Type 1/Type 2 reference example.

When power is supplied from the power supply board, a system reset occurs in the main CPU 300a, and the main CPU 300a performs the following CPU initialization process (S100).

(Step S100-1)
When the power is turned on, the main CPU 300a reads a startup program from the main ROM 300b as an initial setting process, and also performs setting processes required for executing various processes.

(Step S100-3)
The main CPU 300a sets a wait processing time in a timer counter.

(Step S100-5)
The main CPU 300a judges whether a power-off warning signal has been detected. The main control board 300 is provided with a power-off detection circuit, which outputs a power-off warning signal when the power supply voltage falls below a predetermined value. If a power-off warning signal has been detected, the process proceeds to step S100-3, and if a power-off warning signal has not been detected, the process proceeds to step S100-7.

(Step S100-7)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the wait time set in step S100-3 has elapsed or not. If it is judged that the wait time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S100-9, and if it is judged that the wait time has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step S100-5.

(Step S100-9)
The main CPU 300a executes the processes required to permit access to the main RAM 300c.

(Step S100-11)
The main CPU 300a loads the flag value of the gaming machine status flag before the power is turned off into the D register.

(Step S100-13)
The main CPU 300a calculates the checksum and determines whether the calculated checksum matches the checksum saved when the power was turned off (is normal) and whether the backup flag is normal. If it is determined that the backup flag and the checksum are normal, the process proceeds to step S100-15, and if it is determined that either one or both are not normal, the process proceeds to step S100-25.

(Step S100-15)
The main CPU 300a sets an address that does not include a setting value or a gaming machine status flag as the first address to be cleared in the main RAM 300c.

(Step S100-17)
The main CPU 300a judges whether a RAM clear operation signal has been input from the RAM clear switch 182s (whether the RAM clear button has been pressed down). If it is judged that a RAM clear operation signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S100-31, and if it is judged that a RAM clear operation signal has not been input, the process proceeds to step S100-19.

(Step S100-19)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the flag value of the gaming machine status flag loaded in step S100-11 is 00H (playable state), the setting change switch 180s is on, and the middle frame 104 is open. If it is judged that all three conditions are met, the process proceeds to step S100-21, and if it is judged that any one of the three conditions is not met, the process proceeds to step S100-23.

(Step S100-21)
The main CPU 300a sets the gaming machine status flag to 02H (setting confirmation status). That is, when the power is normally turned on in a state where the middle frame 104 is open, the setting change switch 180s is on, and the RAM clear button is not pressed, the gaming machine enters the setting confirmation status.

(Step S100-23)
The main CPU 300a executes an initialization process to clear the areas of the main RAM 300c subsequent to the top address set in step S100-15 that are to be cleared when the power is restored, and then proceeds to step S100-49.

(Step S100-25)
The main CPU 300a sets 05H (checksum abnormal state) in the D register.

(Step S100-27)
The main CPU 300a performs an outside area read/write check process for checking and clearing the read/write memory in the unused area.

(Step S100-29)
The main CPU 300a sets an address including a setting value and a gaming machine status flag as the first address to be cleared in the main RAM 300c.

(Step S100-31)
The main CPU 300a checks and clears the read/write memory of the used area.

(Step S100-33)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the check result of the read/write memory in the above step S100-31 is normal or not. If it is judged as normal, the process proceeds to step S100-37, and if it is judged as not normal, the process proceeds to step S100-35.

(Step S100-35)
The main CPU 300a sets 04H (RAM abnormal state) in the D register, and moves the process to step S100-45.

(Step S100-37)
The main CPU 300a judges whether 02H (setting confirmation state) is set in the D register. If it is judged that 02H is set, the process proceeds to step S100-39, and if it is judged that 02H is not set, the process proceeds to step S100-41.

(Step S100-39)
The main CPU 300a sets the D register to 00H (playable state).

(Step S100-41)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the setting change conditions are satisfied. If it is judged that the setting change conditions are satisfied, the process proceeds to step S100-43, and if it is judged that the setting change conditions are not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S100-45. Note that the setting change conditions here include at least that the setting change switch 180s is turned on, that the middle frame 104 is open, and that a RAM clear operation signal is input from the RAM clear switch 182s.

(Step S100-43)
The main CPU 300a sets the D register to 01H (setting changed state).

(Step S100-45)
The main CPU 300a saves the value set in the D register in the gaming machine status flag.

(Step S100-47)
The main CPU 300a executes an initialization process for clearing the items in the main RAM 300c that are to be cleared when the RAM is cleared, and moves the process to step S100-49.

(Step S100-49)
The main CPU 300a performs a transmission process (storing the RAM clear designation command in a transmission buffer) of a payout command (RAM clear designation command) to inform the payout control board 310 that the main RAM 300c has been cleared.

(Step S100-51)
The main CPU 300a loads the gaming machine status flag.

(Step S100-53)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the gaming machine status flag loaded in step S100-51 is 00H (playable state). If it is judged to be 00H, the process proceeds to step S110, and if it is judged not to be 00H, the process proceeds to step S100-55.

(Step S110)
The main CPU 300a performs a sub-command group set process, which will be described later.

(Step S100-55)
The main CPU 300 a performs sub-command set processing for transmitting predetermined commands to the sub-control board 330 .

(Step S100-57)
The main CPU 300a sets the timer interrupt period.

(Step S100-59)
The main CPU 300a performs processing to disable interrupts.

(Step S100-61)
The main CPU 300a updates the initial value update random number for the winning symbol random number. The initial value update random number for the winning symbol random number is for determining the initial value and the end value of the winning symbol random number. In other words, when the winning symbol random number goes through one cycle from the initial value update random number for the winning symbol random number to the initial value update random number for the winning symbol random number - 1 by the updating process of the winning symbol random number described later, the winning symbol random number is updated to the initial value update random number for the winning symbol random number at that time.

(Step S100-63)
The main CPU 300a analyzes the received data (main commands) received from the payout control board 310 and executes various processes according to the received data.

(Step S100-65)
The main CPU 300 a performs processing to transmit the sub-commands stored in the transmission buffer to the sub-control board 330 .

(Step S100-67)
The main CPU 300a performs processing to permit an interrupt.

(Step S100-69)
The main CPU 300a updates the reach group determination random number, the reach mode determination random number, and the change pattern random number, and thereafter repeats the process from step S100-59. Note that, hereinafter, the reach group determination random number, the reach mode determination random number, and the change pattern random number for determining the change presentation pattern are collectively referred to as the change presentation random number.

Figure 22 is a flowchart explaining the sub-command group set process (S110) in the main control board 300 in the Type 1/Type 2 reference example.

(Step S110-1)
The main CPU 300a loads the flag value of the gaming machine status flag.

(Step S110-3)
The main CPU 300 a performs sub-command set processing for transmitting predetermined commands to the sub-control board 330 .

(Step S110-5)
The main CPU 300a performs a model command setting process to set a model command indicating model information of the gaming machine 100 in a transmission buffer.

(Step S110-7)
The main CPU 300a performs a setting value designation command setting process for setting a setting value designation command indicating a registered setting value in a transmission buffer.

(Step S110-9)
The main CPU 300a performs a special chart 1 reservation designation command setting process that sets a special chart 1 reservation designation command indicating the special chart 1 reservation number in a transmission buffer.

(Step S110-11)
The main CPU 300a performs a special chart 2 reservation designation command setting process that sets a special chart 2 reservation designation command indicating the special chart 2 reservation number in a transmission buffer.

(Step S110-13)
The main CPU 300a performs a count command setting process for setting a count command indicating the remaining number of times in the time-shortened gaming state in a transmission buffer.

(Step S110-15)
The main CPU 300a performs a variation pattern selection state designation command setting process that sets a variation pattern selection state designation command indicating the variation pattern selection state in a transmission buffer.

(Step S110-17)
The main CPU 300a performs a special game phase designation command setting process for setting a special game phase designation command indicating a special game management phase in a transmission buffer. The special game management phase will be described later.

(Step S110-19)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the special game management phase is in a special symbol change waiting state. If it is judged that the special symbol change waiting state is in effect, the process proceeds to step S110-21, and if it is judged that the special symbol change waiting state is not in effect, the sub-command group set process is terminated.

(Step S110-21)
The main CPU 300a sets the customer waiting designation command in the transmission buffer, and ends the sub-command group setting process.

Next, we will explain the interrupt processing in the main control board 300. Here, we will explain the power-off evacuation processing (XINT interrupt processing) and timer interrupt processing.

(Power off save process of main control board 300 (XINT interrupt process))
23 is a flow chart for explaining the power-off save process (XINT interrupt process) in the main control board 300 according to the first type second type reference example. The main CPU 300a monitors the power-off detection circuit, and when the power supply voltage falls below a predetermined value, it interrupts the CPU initialization process and executes the power-off save process.

(Step S300-1)
When the power-off warning signal is input, the main CPU 300a saves the registers.

(Step S300-3)
The main CPU 300a checks the power-off warning signal.

(Step S300-5)
The main CPU 300a judges whether a power-off warning signal has been detected. If it is judged that a power-off warning signal has been detected, the process proceeds to step S300-11. If it is judged that a power-off warning signal has not been detected, the process proceeds to step S300-7.

(Step S300-7)
The main CPU 300a restores the register.

(Step S300-9)
The main CPU 300a performs processing to permit an interrupt, and ends the power-off save processing.

(Step S300-11)
The main CPU 300a executes an output port clear process to stop the output of the output port.

(Step S300-13)
The main CPU 300a executes a checksum setting process that calculates and stores a checksum.

(Step S300-15)
The main CPU 300a executes a RAM protect setting process required to prohibit access to the main RAM 300c.

(Step S300-17)
In order to set the power interruption occurrence monitoring time, the main CPU 300a sets the counter value of a loop counter to a predetermined number of times the power interruption detection signal has been detected.

(Step S300-19)
The main CPU 300a checks the power-off warning signal.

(Step S300-21)
The main CPU 300a judges whether a power-off warning signal has been detected. If it is judged that a power-off warning signal has been detected, the process proceeds to step S300-17. If it is judged that a power-off warning signal has not been detected, the process proceeds to step S300-23.

(Step S300-23)
The main CPU 300a subtracts 1 from the value of the loop counter set in step S300-17.

(Step S300-25)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the counter value of the loop counter is 0. If it is judged that the counter value is not 0, the process proceeds to step S300-19, and if it is judged that the counter value is 0, the process proceeds to the above-mentioned CPU initialization process (step S100).

If a power outage actually occurs, operation of the gaming machine 100 will stop while steps S300-17 to S300-25 are looping.

(Timer interrupt processing of main control board 300)
24 is a flow chart for explaining the timer interrupt process in the main control board 300 according to the Class 1, Class 2 Reference Example. The main control board 300 is provided with a reset clock pulse generating circuit that generates a clock pulse every predetermined period (4 milliseconds in the Class 1, Class 2 Reference Example, hereinafter referred to as "4 ms"). When a clock pulse is generated by the reset clock pulse generating circuit, the CPU initialization process (step S100) is interrupted and the following timer interrupt process is executed.

(Step S400-1)
The main CPU 300a saves the registers.

(Step S400-3)
The main CPU 300a performs processing to permit an interrupt.

(Step S400-5)
The main CPU 300a outputs the common data set in the common output buffer to the output port, and executes dynamic port output processing which controls the lighting of the first special pattern display 160, the second special pattern display 162, the first special pattern reserved indicator 164, the second special pattern reserved indicator 166, the normal pattern display 168, the normal pattern reserved indicator 170, the right hit notification indicator 172, and the performance display monitor 184.

(Step S400-7)
The main CPU 300a reads various types of input port information and executes a port input process to accurately obtain the latest switch states.

(Step S400-9)
The main CPU 300a loads the flag value of the gaming machine status flag.

(Step S400-11)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the flag value loaded in step S400-9 is 00H (playable state). If it is judged to be 00H, the process proceeds to step S400-15, and if it is judged not to be 00H, the process proceeds to step S400-13.

(Step S400-13)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the flag value loaded in step S400-9 is equal to or greater than 03H (abnormal setting). If it is judged to be equal to or greater than 03H, the process proceeds to step S400-27. If it is judged to be not equal to or greater than 03H, the process proceeds to step S450.

(Step S450)
The main CPU 300a executes a setting-related process, and moves the process to step S400-27. The setting-related process will be described later.

(Step S400-15)
The main CPU 300a performs a timer update process to update various timer counters. Here, unless otherwise specified, the timer counters are decremented every time the timer interrupt process of the main control board 300 is performed, and the decrement stops when the timer counters reach 0.

(Step S400-17)
The main CPU 300a executes an update process for the initial value update random number for the winning symbol random number, similar to step S100-61 described above.

(Step S400-19)
The main CPU 300a performs a process of updating the winning symbol random number. Specifically, the random number counter is updated by adding 1, and if the result of the addition exceeds the maximum value of the random number range, the random number counter is reset to 0, and if the random number counter has completed one cycle, the random number is updated from the value of the initial value update random number for the winning symbol random number at that time.

Although a detailed explanation is omitted, in the Type 1/Type 2 reference example, the jackpot determination random number and the win determination random number use hardware random numbers updated by a hardware random number generation unit built into the main control board 300. The hardware random number generation unit updates both the jackpot determination random number and the win determination random number according to certain rules, automatically changing the random number sequence each time the random number sequence goes through one cycle, and changing the start value each time the system is reset.

(Step S500)
The main CPU 300a executes a switch management process to determine whether or not a signal has been input from the first start hole detection switch 120s, the second start hole detection switch 122s, the gate detection switch 124s, the first big prize hole detection switch 126s, the second big prize hole detection switch 128s, the specific area detection switch 140s, and the out ball detection switch 130s. Details of this switch management process will be described later.

(Step S600)
The main CPU 300a executes a special game management process for controlling the progress of the special games. The details of this special game management process will be described later.

(Step S700)
The main CPU 300a executes a normal game management process for controlling the progress of the normal game. The details of this normal game management process will be described later.

(Step S400-21)
The main CPU 300a executes an error management process for determining various errors and making settings according to the error determination results.

(Step S400-23)
The main CPU 300a checks the general prize hole detection switch 118s, the first start hole detection switch 120s, the second start hole detection switch 122s, the first large prize hole detection switch 126s, and the second large prize hole detection switch 128s, and executes prize hole switch processing to increment the corresponding counters for prize ball control, etc.

(Step S400-25)
The main CPU 300a executes a payout control management process to create and transmit a payout command based on the counter value of the counter for controlling the winning balls set in the above step S400-23.

(Step S400-27)
The main CPU 300a executes an external information management process for setting output data for external information to be output from the game information output terminal board 312 to the outside.

(Step S400-29)
The main CPU 300a executes an LED display setting process which sets display data for controlling the lighting of various indicators (LEDs), such as the first special pattern display 160, the second special pattern display 162, the first special pattern reserved indicator 164, the second special pattern reserved indicator 166, the normal pattern display 168, the normal pattern reserved indicator 170, and the right hit notification indicator 172, in an output buffer corresponding to each common.

(Step S400-31)
The main CPU 300a executes a solenoid output image synthesis process to synthesize the solenoid output images of the normal electric gimmick solenoid 122c, the first large prize opening solenoid 126c, the second large prize opening solenoid 128c and the movable member drive solenoid 142c, and store them in an output port buffer.

(Step S400-33)
The main CPU 300a executes a port output process for outputting the values of the common output buffers stored in the respective output port buffers to the output ports.

(Step S400-35)
The main CPU 300a performs processing to disable interrupts.

(Step S400-37)
The main CPU 300a uses the unused area of the main RAM 300c to perform processing for calculating a base ratio to be displayed on the performance display monitor 184, and executes a performance display monitor control processing for setting common data for displaying the calculated base ratio on the performance display monitor 184 in a common output buffer. In the performance display monitor control processing, the base ratio is calculated for each predetermined period. Here, the performance display monitor 184 may switch between displaying the base ratio for the current period and the base ratio for the previous period at predetermined time intervals. Also, the base ratio displayed on the performance display monitor 184 may be switched in response to a predetermined operation.

(Step S400-39)
The main CPU 300a restores the registers and ends the timer interrupt process.

Figure 25 is a flowchart explaining the above setting-related process (S450) for the Type 1/Type 2 reference example.

(Step S450-1)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the flag value of the gaming machine state flag is 01H (setting change state). If it is judged to be 01H, the process proceeds to step S450-3, and if it is judged not to be 01H, the process proceeds to step S450-15.

(Step S450-3)
The main CPU 300a loads the registered setting values stored in the setting value buffer into a predetermined processing area.

(Step S450-5)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the RAM clear switch 182s has been pressed (whether a RAM clear operation signal has been input). If it is judged that the RAM clear switch 182s has been pressed, the process proceeds to step S450-7, and if it is judged that the RAM clear switch 182s has not been pressed, the process proceeds to step S450-9.

(Step S450-7)
The main CPU 300a adds 1 to the setting value of the processing area.

(Step S450-9)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the setting value of the processing area is in the range of 1 to 6. As a result, if it is judged that the setting value is in the range of 1 to 6, the process proceeds to step S450-13, and if it is judged that the setting value is not in the range of 1 to 6, the process proceeds to step S450-11.

(Step S450-11)
The main CPU 300a sets the setting value of the processing area to 1.

(Step S450-13)
The main CPU 300a sets the setting value of the processing area in the setting value buffer.

(Step S450-15)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the setting change switch 180s is on. If it is judged that the setting change switch 180s is on, the setting-related process is terminated, and if it is judged that the setting change switch 180s is not on, the process proceeds to step S450-17.

(Step S450-17)
The main CPU 300a sets a setting-related end designation command, which indicates the end of the setting-related processing, in the transmission buffer.

(Step S110)
The main CPU 300a executes the sub-command group set process of Fig. 22. That is, when the setting-related process is executed, at the end of the process, the model command, the setting value designation command, the special chart 1 reservation designation command, the special chart 2 reservation designation command, the number of times command, the variation pattern selection state designation command, the special chart phase designation command, and the customer waiting designation command are transmitted to the sub-control board 330.

(Step S450-19)
The main CPU 300a sets the gaming machine state flag to 00H (playable state), and ends the setting-related processing.

As described above, according to the Type 1/Type 2 Reference Example, when the power is turned on normally with the middle frame 104 open, the setting change switch 180s on, and the RAM clear button pressed, the gaming machine status flag is set to 01H (setting change state) in the CPU initialization process (Figure 20). After that, the timer interrupt process is executed, but because the gaming machine status flag is set to 01H (setting change state), all processes related to the progress of the game (steps S400-15 to S400-25 in Figure 24) are stopped, and setting-related processes are executed.

The setting-related process is executed repeatedly while the setting change switch 180s is on, and during this setting-related process, pressing the RAM clear button is accepted as a setting change operation for the registered setting value. In other words, during the setting change process (S450-1 to S450-13) that accepts setting change operations, the registered setting value stored in the setting value buffer is switched to one of multiple setting values in response to the setting change operation.

When the setting change switch 180s is switched off while the gaming machine status flag is set to 01H (setting change state), the setting change process ends and the gaming machine status flag is set to 00H (playable state). This makes it possible to execute processes related to the progress of the game, starting with the next timer interrupt process.

Here, in the setting-related processing relating to the Type 1 and Type 2 reference examples, after the operation of pressing the RAM clear button, i.e., the acceptance of the operation of changing the registered setting value, is finished, a setting value designation command corresponding to the registered setting value is sent to the sub-control board 330 in the sub-command group set processing. On the other hand, while the setting change operation is being accepted, the setting value designation command is not sent to the sub-control board 330. In this way, while the setting change operation is being accepted, the setting value designation command is not sent, and when the acceptance of the setting change operation is finished and the state transitions to one in which game progress is possible, the risk of the registered setting value being obtained illegally can be reduced by sending the setting value designation command.

In addition, in the Type 1/Type 2 reference example, multiple flag values including at least 01H (setting change state) are switched. Then, when the gaming machine state flag is set to 01H (setting change state), setting-related processing can be executed, and the progress of the game is stopped. In this way, since setting-related processing is not executed while the game is in progress, setting value designation commands are not sent while the game is in progress, and the risk of registered setting values being obtained illegally is reduced.

Next, we will explain in detail the switch management process in step S500, the special game management process in step S600, and the regular game management process in step S700 of the timer interrupt process described above.

Figure 26 is a flowchart explaining the switch management process (step S500) in the main control board 300 in the Type 1/Type 2 reference example.

(Step S500-1)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the gate detection switch is ON, that is, whether the game ball has passed through the gate 124 and the detection signal from the gate detection switch 124s has been turned ON. If it is judged that the gate detection switch is ON, the process proceeds to step S510, and if it is judged that the gate detection switch is not ON, the process proceeds to step S500-3.

(Step S510)
The main CPU 300a executes a gate passing process based on the passage of the gaming ball through the gate 124. The gate passing process will be described in detail later.

(Step S500-3)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the first start hole detection switch is ON, that is, whether a game ball has entered the first start hole 120 and a detection signal has been input from the first start hole detection switch 120s. If it is determined that the first start hole detection switch is ON, the process proceeds to step S520, and if it is determined that the first start hole detection switch is not ON, the process proceeds to step S500-5.

(Step S520)
The main CPU 300a executes a first start hole passing process based on the entry of the gaming ball into the first start hole 120. The first start hole passing process will be described in detail later.

(Step S500-5)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the second start hole detection switch is ON, that is, whether a game ball has entered the second start hole 122 and a detection signal has been input from the second start hole detection switch 122s. If it is determined that the second start hole detection switch is ON, the process proceeds to step S530, and if it is determined that the second start hole detection switch is not ON, the process proceeds to step S500-7.

(Step S530)
The main CPU 300a executes a second start hole passing process based on the entry of the gaming ball into the second start hole 122. The second start hole passing process will be described in detail later.

(Step S500-7)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the time has come when the large prize opening detection switch is detected as ON, that is, whether a game ball has entered the first large prize opening 126 and the second large prize opening 128 and a detection signal has been input from the first large prize opening detection switch 126s and the second large prize opening detection switch 128s. If it is determined that the time has come when the large prize opening detection switch is detected as ON, the process proceeds to step S500-9, and if it is determined that the time has not come when the large prize opening detection switch is detected as ON, the process proceeds to step S500-11.

(Step S500-9)
The main CPU 300a judges whether or not a big prize game or a small prize game is currently in progress, and judges whether the game balls have entered the first big prize opening 126 and the second big prize opening 128 properly. If it is judged that a big prize game or a small prize game is not in progress, a predetermined fraud detection process is executed, and if it is judged that a big prize game or a small prize game is in progress and the game balls have entered the first big prize opening 126 and the second big prize opening 128 properly, the main CPU 300a increments the big prize opening winning ball number counter by 1, and sets a big prize opening winning designation command in the transmission buffer.

(Step S500-11)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the specific area detection switch is ON, that is, whether the game ball has entered the specific area 140b and a detection signal has been input from the specific area detection switch 140s. If it is judged that the specific area detection switch is ON, the process proceeds to step S540, and if it is judged that the specific area detection switch is not ON, the process proceeds to step S500-13.

(Step S540)
The main CPU 300a executes a specific area passing process based on the entry of the gaming ball into the specific area 140b, and ends the switch management process. The specific area passing process will be described in detail later.

(Step S500-13)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the general winning opening detection switch is ON, that is, whether a game ball has entered the general winning opening 118 and a detection signal has been input from the general winning opening detection switch 118s. If it is judged as a result that the general winning opening detection switch is ON, the process proceeds to step S500-15, and if it is judged as not ON, the process proceeds to step S500-17.

(Step S500-15)
The main CPU 300a sets a general prize slot winning designation command in the transmission buffer.

(Step S500-17)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the out ball detection switch is on, i.e., whether a detection signal has been input from the out ball detection switch 130s. If it is determined that the out ball detection switch is on, the process proceeds to step S500-19, and if it is determined that the out ball detection switch is not on, the switch management process is terminated.

(Step S500-19)
The main CPU 300a sets the out ball detection designation command in the transmission buffer and terminates the switch management process.

Figure 27 is a flowchart explaining the gate passage process (step S510) in the main control board 300 for the Type 1/Type 2 reference example.

(Step S510-1)
The main CPU 300a loads the winning determination random number updated by the hardware random number generator.

(Step S510-3)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the counter value of the normal pattern reserved ball counter is equal to or greater than the maximum value, that is, whether the counter value of the normal pattern reserved ball counter is equal to or greater than 4. If it is judged that the counter value of the normal pattern reserved ball counter is equal to or greater than the maximum value, the gate passing process is terminated, and if it is judged that the normal pattern reserved ball counter is not equal to or greater than the maximum value, the process proceeds to step S510-5.

(Step S510-5)
The main CPU 300a updates the counter value of the normal symbol reserved ball count counter to a value obtained by adding "1" to the current counter value.

(Step S510-7)
The main CPU 300a determines which of the four memory sections in the general reserve memory area is to be the target memory section in which to save the acquired winning determination random number.

(Step S510-9)
The main CPU 300a saves the winning determination random number obtained in the above step S510-1 in the target memory calculated in the above step S510-7.

(Step S510-11)
The main CPU 300a sets a regular map reservation designation command indicating the number of regular map reservations stored in the regular map reservation memory area in the transmission buffer, and terminates the gate passing process.

Figure 28 is a flow chart explaining the first start port passing process (step S520) in the main control board 300 for the Type 1/Type 2 reference example.

(Step S520-1)
The main CPU 300a sets "00H" as the special symbol identification value. The special symbol identification value is used to identify whether the reserved type is special 1 reserved or special 2 reserved, and the special symbol identification value (00H) indicates special 1 reserved, and the special symbol identification value (01H) indicates special 2 reserved.

(Step S520-3)
The main CPU 300a sets the address of the reserved ball count counter for special pattern 1.

(Step S535)
The main CPU 300a executes the special symbol random number acquisition process and ends the first start hole passing process. This special symbol random number acquisition process is executed using a module common to the second start hole passing process (step S530). Therefore, the details of the special symbol random number acquisition process will be explained after the explanation of the second start hole passing process.

Figure 29 is a flow chart explaining the second start port passing process (step S530) in the main control board 300 for the Type 1/Type 2 reference example.

(Step S530-1)
The main CPU 300a sets "01H" as the special symbol identification value.

(Step S530-3)
The main CPU 300a sets the address of the special pattern 2 reserved ball count counter.

(Step S535)
The main CPU 300a executes a special symbol random number acquisition process, which will be described later.

(Step S530-5)
The main CPU 300a loads the normal game management phase. The normal game management phase indicates the stage of the execution process of the normal game, i.e., the progress of the normal game, and is updated according to the stage of the execution process of the normal game, as will be described later in detail.

(Step S530-7)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the normal game management phase loaded in step S530-5 is "04H". The normal game management phase "04H" indicates that the normal electric role winning hole opening control process is in progress. In this normal electric role winning hole opening control process, the normal electric role solenoid 122c is energized and the movable piece 122b is controlled to be in an open state, so here, it is judged whether the second start hole 122 is in a state in which it can be opened properly. As a result, if it is judged that the normal game management phase is not "04H", the second start hole passing process is terminated, and if it is judged that the normal game management phase is "04H", the process is transferred to step S530-9.

(Step S530-9)
The main CPU 300a updates the counter value of the normal electric device winning ball count counter to a value obtained by adding "1" to the current counter value, and ends the second starting hole passing process.

Figure 30 is a flow chart explaining the special symbol random number acquisition process (step S535) in the main control board 300 for the Type 1/Type 2 reference example. This special symbol random number acquisition process is executed using a common module in the first start port passing process (step S520) and the second start port passing process (step S530) described above.

(Step S535-1)
The main CPU 300a loads the special symbol identification value set in step S520-1 or step S530-1.

(Step S535-3)
The main CPU 300a loads the number of reserved balls for the target special symbol. Here, if the special symbol identification value loaded in the above step S535-1 is "00H", the counter value of the reserved ball counter for the special symbol 1, i.e., the reserved number for special 1, is loaded. Also, if the special symbol identification value loaded in the above step S535-1 is "01H", the counter value of the reserved ball counter for the special symbol 2, i.e., the reserved number for special 2, is loaded.

(Step S535-5)
The main CPU 300a loads the jackpot determination random number updated by the hardware random number generating unit.

(Step S535-7)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the number of reserved balls of the target special symbol loaded in step S535-3 is equal to or greater than the upper limit. If it is judged to be equal to or greater than the upper limit, the process proceeds to step S535-23. If it is judged not to be equal to or greater than the upper limit, the process proceeds to step S535-9.

(Step S535-9)
The main CPU 300a updates the counter value of the target special pattern reserved ball count counter to a value obtained by adding "1" to the current counter value.

(Step S535-11)
The main CPU 300a calculates a target memory section among the eight memory sections of the special chart reserved memory area in which to save the acquired jackpot determination random number.

(Step S535-13)
The main CPU 300a obtains the jackpot determination random number loaded in step S535-5, the winning pattern random number updated in step S400-19, the reach group determination random number, reach mode determination random number, and variation pattern random number updated in step S100-69, and stores them in the target memory unit calculated in step S535-11.

(Step S535-15)
The main CPU 300a performs a special symbol reserved ball winning order setting process for updating and storing the winning order of the special 1 reserved and special 2 reserved balls stored in the special symbol reserved memory area.

(Step S536)
The main CPU 300a executes the acquisition time performance determination process based on the various random numbers stored in the target memory unit in the above step S535-13. In this acquisition time performance determination process, the information on the big role lottery result brought about by the newly stored special 1 reserve or special 2 reserve and the execution mode of the variable performance is determined at the time when the special 1 reserve or special 2 reserve is stored. The details of this acquisition time performance determination process will be described later.

(Step S535-19)
The main CPU 300a loads the counter values of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter and the special pattern 2 reserved ball count counter.

(Step S535-21)
The main CPU 300a sets the special reserved command in the transmission buffer based on the counter value loaded in step S535-19. Here, the special reserved command is set based on the counter value (special reserved number of special 1) of the special reserved ball counter, and the special reserved command is set based on the counter value (special reserved number of special 2) of the special reserved ball counter. As a result, the special reserved number of special 1 and the special reserved number of special 2 are transmitted to the sub-control board 330 every time the special reserved number of special 1 or special reserved number of special 2 is stored.

(Step S535-23)
The main CPU 300a loads the normal game management phase.

(Step S535-25)
The main CPU 300a checks the normal game management phase loaded in step S535-23 and judges whether it is below the normal electric device winning opening control state described later. If it is judged to be below the normal electric device winning opening control state, the process proceeds to step S535-27, and if it is judged not to be below the normal electric device winning opening control state, the special symbol random number acquisition process is terminated.

(Step S535-27)
The main CPU 300a determines whether or not an abnormal winning has occurred, and if it determines that an abnormal winning has occurred, executes a start port abnormal winning error process to perform a predetermined processing, and ends the special pattern random number acquisition process (step S535).

Figure 31 is a flowchart explaining the performance determination process (step S536) at the time of acquisition in the main control board 300 for the Type 1/Type 2 reference example.

(Step S536-1)
The main CPU 300a selects a corresponding jackpot determination random number judgment table based on the setting value being set. Specifically, if the reserved number stored is the special 1 reserved number, then one of the corresponding special 1 jackpot determination random number judgment tables (see FIG. 6(a) to FIG. 6(f)) is selected based on the setting value being set. If the reserved number stored is the special 2 reserved number, then one of the corresponding special 2 jackpot determination random number judgment tables (see FIG. 7(a) to FIG. 7(f)) is selected based on the setting value being set. Then, a special symbol provisional win judgment process is performed to provisionally judge whether the jackpot is a jackpot, a small win, or a miss based on the selected table and the jackpot determination random number stored in the target memory unit in step S535-13.

(Step S536-3)
The main CPU 300a executes a special symbol provisional determination process for provisionally determining a special symbol. Here, if the result of the provisional big role lottery in the above step S536-1 (the result derived by the special symbol provisional win determination process) is a big win or a small win, the winning symbol random number, the winning type (whether it is a big win or a small win), and the reserved type stored in the target memory in the above step S535-13 are loaded, the corresponding winning symbol random number determination table (see FIG. 8) is selected to extract special symbol determination data, and the extracted special symbol determination data (type of big win symbol or small win symbol) is saved. Also, if the result of the provisional big role lottery in the above step S536-1 is a loss, a predetermined special symbol determination data for a loss (type of loss symbol) is saved.

(Step S536-5)
The main CPU 300a sets in the transmission buffer a look-ahead symbol type designation command (look-ahead designation command) corresponding to the special symbol determination data saved in step S536-3.

(Step S536-7)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the result derived by the special symbol winning provisional judgment process in the above step S536-1 is a big win or a small win. If it is judged to be a big win or a small win, the process proceeds to step S536-9, and if it is judged not to be a big win or a small win (miss), the process proceeds to step S536-11.

(Step S536-9)
The main CPU 300a sets the random number judgment table for determining the reach mode at the time of a big win (see Figures 10(b) and (c)) or the random number judgment table for determining the reach mode at the time of a small win (see Figures 10(d) and (e)), and transfers the processing to step S536-19.

(Step S536-11)
The main CPU 300a loads the reach group determination random number stored in the target memory section in step S535-13.

(Step S536-13)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the reach group determination random number loaded in step S536-11 is a fixed value (8500 or more). Here, the group type is determined by referring to the reach group determination random number judgment table, and this reach group determination random number judgment table is selected according to the number of reserved items stored. At this time, the reach group determination random number is acquired from a range of 0 to 10006, and if the value of the reach group determination random number is 8500 or more, the same reach group determination random number judgment table is selected regardless of the number of reserved items, and if the value of the reach group determination random number is less than 8500, a different reach group determination random number judgment table is selected depending on the number of reserved items. Hereinafter, the value of the reach group determination random number in the range of 0 to 8499, where a different reach group determination random number judgment table is selected depending on the number of reserved items, is referred to as an indefinite value, and the value in the range of 8500 to 10006, where the same reach group determination random number judgment table is selected regardless of the number of reserved items, is referred to as a fixed value. If it is determined that the reach group determination random number loaded in step S536-11 above is a fixed value (8,500 or more), processing is transferred to step S536-15, and if it is determined that the reach group determination random number loaded in step S536-11 above is not a fixed value (8,500 or more), processing is transferred to step S536-27.

(Step S536-15)
The main CPU 300a sets a reach group determination random number judgment table (see FIG. 9). Note that, although there are multiple types of reach group determination random number judgment tables provided according to the reserved number, here, a table to be used when the reserved number is 0 is selected. Then, a reach group (group type) is provisionally determined based on the set reach group determination random number judgment table and the reach group determination random number stored in the target memory unit in step S535-13.

(Step S536-17)
The main CPU 300a sets the miss-time reach mode determination random number judgment table (see FIG. 10(a)) corresponding to the group type provisionally determined in step S536-15, and moves the process to step S536-19.

(Step S536-19)
The main CPU 300a provisionally determines a variation mode number based on the reach mode determination random number judgment table set in the above step S536-9 or step S536-17 and the reach mode determination random number stored in the target memory unit in the above step S535-13. Here, a variation pattern random number judgment table is provisionally determined together with the variation mode number.

(Step S536-21)
The main CPU 300a sets in the transmission buffer a read-ahead designation fluctuation mode command (read-ahead designation command) corresponding to the fluctuation mode number tentatively determined in step S536-19.

(Step S536-23)
The main CPU 300a provisionally determines a fluctuation pattern number based on the fluctuation pattern random number determination table provisionally determined in the above step S536-19 and the fluctuation pattern random number stored in the target memory unit in the above step S535-13.

(Step S536-25)
The main CPU 300a sets in the transmission buffer a look-ahead specified variable pattern command (look-ahead specification command) corresponding to the variable pattern number provisionally determined in step S536-23 above, and terminates the performance determination process at the time of acquisition.

(Step S536-27)
The main CPU 300a sets in the transmission buffer an indefinite value command (look-ahead specified variable mode command and look-ahead specified variable pattern command = 7FH) indicating that the group type, i.e., the variable presentation pattern, will change depending on the number of holds when the holds are read out for the holds newly stored in the target memory unit, and terminates the presentation determination process at the time of acquisition.

Figure 32 is a flowchart explaining the specific area passing process of step S540 described above for the Type 1/Type 2 reference example.

(Step S540-1)
When the main CPU 300a determines in step S500-11 that the specific area detection switch has been turned on, it determines whether the valid period flag is on. If it determines that the valid period flag is on, it proceeds to step S540-3, and if it determines that the valid period flag is not on, it proceeds to step S540-9.

Although more details will be given later, this validity period flag is used to determine whether or not the entry of the game ball into the specific area 140b is considered valid, and in the Type 1/Type 2 reference example, it is turned on at the start of the small win game (first round game).

(Step S540-3)
In the above step S540-1, if it is determined that the valid period flag is on, the main CPU 300a determines whether the specific area entry flag is on. The specific area entry flag is used to identify that the gaming ball has already validly entered the specific area 140b. If it is determined that the specific area entry flag is on, the specific area passing process is terminated, and if it is determined that the specific area entry flag is not on, the process proceeds to step S540-5.

(Step S540-5)
The main CPU 300a turns on the specific area entry flag.

(Step S540-7)
The main CPU 300a sets a specific area entry command in the transmission buffer to notify the sub-control board 330 that the gaming ball has validly entered the specific area 140b, and ends the specific area passing process.

(Step S540-9)
The main CPU 300a executes a predetermined error process.

(Step S540-11)
The main CPU 300a sets an error command indicating that an error has been detected in the transmission buffer, and ends the specific area passing process.

Figure 33 is a diagram explaining the special game management phase in the Type 1/Type 2 Reference Example. As already explained, in the Type 1/Type 2 Reference Example, a special game triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first start port 120 or the second start port 122, and a normal game triggered by the passage of a game ball through the gate 124 proceed simultaneously in parallel. The processing related to the special game is executed stepwise and repeatedly, and the main control board 300 manages each processing related to such special games by the special game management phase.

As shown in FIG. 33, the main ROM 300b stores a plurality of special game control modules for controlling the execution of special games, and each of these special game control modules is associated with a special game management phase. Specifically, if the special game management phase is "00H", a module for executing "special symbol change waiting process" is called, if the special game management phase is "01H", a module for executing "special symbol change process" is called, if the special game management phase is "02H", a module for executing "special symbol stop pattern display process" is called, if the special game management phase is "03H" or "07H", a module for executing "large prize opening pre-processing" is called, if the special game management phase is "04H" or "08H", a module for executing "large prize opening control process" is called, if the special game management phase is "05H" or "09H", a module for executing "large prize opening closing valid process" is called, if the special game management phase is "06H" or "0AH", a module for executing "large prize opening end wait process" is called.

Figure 34 is a flowchart explaining the special game management process (step S600) in the main control board 300 for the Type 1/Type 2 reference example.

(Step S600-1)
The main CPU 300a loads the special game management phase.

(Step S600-3)
The main CPU 300a selects the special game control module corresponding to the special game management phase loaded in step S600-1.

(Step S600-5)
The main CPU 300a calls the special game control module selected in step S600-3 and starts processing.

(Step S600-7)
The main CPU 300a loads a special game timer that manages the control time of the special game, and ends the special game management process.

Figure 35 is a flowchart explaining the special symbol change waiting process in the main control board 300 for the Type 1/Type 2 reference example. This special symbol change waiting process is executed when the special game management phase is "00H".

(Step S610-1)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the counter value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter, that is, the special 2 reserved number (X2) is "1" or more. If it is judged that the special 2 reserved number (X2) is "1" or more, the process proceeds to step S610-7, and if it is judged that the special 2 reserved number (X2) is not "1" or more, the process proceeds to step S610-3.

(Step S610-3)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the counter value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter, that is, the special 1 reserved number (X1) is 1 or more. If it is judged that the special 1 reserved number (X1) is 1 or more, the process proceeds to step S610-7, and if it is judged that the special 1 reserved number (X1) is not 1 or more, the process proceeds to step S610-5.

(Step S610-5)
The main CPU 300a sets a customer waiting command in the transmission buffer, executes a customer waiting setting process to set the machine in a customer waiting state, and ends the special pattern change waiting process.

(Step S610-7)
The main CPU 300a transfers the special 2 reserved balls stored in the first to fourth storage units of the second special pattern reserved storage area, or the special 1 reserved balls stored in the first to fourth storage units of the first special pattern reserved storage area, to a storage unit with a smaller ordinal number by one. Specifically, when it is determined in the above step S610-1 that the number of reserved balls for special pattern 2 is "1" or more, the special 2 reserved balls stored in the second to fourth storage units of the second special pattern reserved storage area are transferred to the first to third storage units. In addition, the main RAM 300c is provided with a 0th storage unit to be processed, and the special 2 reserved balls stored in the 1st storage unit are block-transferred to the 0th storage unit. In addition, in the above step S610-3, if it is determined that the number of reserved balls of the special pattern 1 is "1" or more, the special pattern 1 reserved balls stored in the second storage section to the fourth storage section of the first special pattern reserved memory area are transferred to the first storage section to the third storage section, and the special pattern 1 reserved balls stored in the first storage section are block-transferred to the 0th storage section. In addition, in this special pattern memory area shift process, the counter value of the target special pattern reserved ball count counter corresponding to the reserved type transferred to the 0th storage section is decremented by "1", and a reserved reduction designation command indicating that the special pattern 1 reserved balls or the special pattern 2 reserved balls have been decremented by "1" is set in the transmission buffer.

(Step S611)
The main CPU 300a executes a special symbol winning determination process for performing a lottery for a big win. This special symbol winning determination process will be described later.

(Step S610-11)
The main CPU 300a executes a special symbol pattern determination process for determining a special symbol. Here, if the determination information (lottery result of the big role lottery) stored in the above step S611 is a big win or a small win, the winning type (whether it is a big win or a small win) and the reserved type are loaded, and the corresponding winning symbol random number determination table is set. Then, the set winning symbol random number determination table is referenced, and the special symbol determination data is extracted using the winning symbol random number transferred to the 0th storage unit, and the extracted special symbol determination data (type of big win symbol or small win symbol) is saved. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the big role lottery stored in the above step S611 is a loss, if the reserved type is special 1 reserved, the special symbol X is saved as a losing symbol, and if the reserved type is special 2 reserved, the special symbol Y is saved as a losing symbol. Here, a symbol type designation command corresponding to the saved special symbol determination data is set in the transmission buffer.

(Step S610-13)
The main CPU 300a saves the special symbol stop symbol number corresponding to the special symbol determination data extracted in step S610-11. The first special symbol display 160 and the second special symbol display 162 are each composed of 7 segments, and each segment constituting the 7 segments is associated with a number (counter value). The special symbol stop symbol number determined here indicates the number (counter value) of the segment that will finally be lit up.

(Step S612)
The main CPU 300a executes a special symbol variable number determination process for determining a variable mode number and a variable pattern number. The details of this special symbol variable number determination process will be described later.

(Step S610-15)
The main CPU 300a loads the fluctuation mode number and the fluctuation pattern number determined in step S612, and refers to the fluctuation time determination table to determine the fluctuation time 1 and the fluctuation time 2. Then, the total time of the determined fluctuation times 1 and 2 is set in the special symbol fluctuation timer.

(Step S610-17)
The main CPU 300a performs a reserve area setting process for storing the game state when the big role lottery is executed in a game state buffer, etc. In addition, in this reserve area setting process, when the result of the big role lottery is a big win, game state information to be set after the big role game, the type of big win symbol (special symbol determination data), etc. are stored in the reserve area of the main RAM 300c.

(Step S610-19)
The main CPU 300a executes a process of setting a special symbol display counter in order to start the variable display of the special symbol in the first special symbol display 160 or the second special symbol display 162. A counter value is associated with each segment of the 7-segment that constitutes the first special symbol display 160 and the second special symbol display 162, and the segment corresponding to the counter value set in the special symbol display counter is controlled to light up. Here, the counter value corresponding to the segment to be lit at the start of the variable display of the special symbol is set in the special symbol display counter. Note that the special symbol display counter is provided separately as a special symbol 1 display counter corresponding to the first special symbol display 160 and a special symbol 2 display counter corresponding to the second special symbol display 162, and here, a counter value is set in the counter corresponding to the reserved type.

(Step S610-21)
The main CPU 300a loads the counter values of the special pattern 1 reserved ball counter and the special pattern 2 reserved ball counter, and sets the special pattern reserved designation command in the transmission buffer. Here, the special pattern 1 reserved designation command is set based on the counter value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball counter (special 1 reserved number), and the special pattern 2 reserved designation command is set based on the counter value of the special pattern 2 reserved ball counter (special 2 reserved number). In addition, here, the special pattern winning order command corresponding to the winning order of the special 1 reserved and special 2 reserved stored in the above step S610-7 is set in the transmission buffer. As a result, every time the special 1 reserved or special 2 reserved is consumed, the special 1 reserved number and the special 2 reserved number, as well as the winning order of each of these reserved numbers, are transmitted to the sub-control board 330.

(Step S610-23)
The main CPU 300a updates the special game management phase to "01H" and ends the special symbol change waiting process.

Figure 36 is a flowchart explaining the special symbol winning determination process (S611) for the Type 1/Type 2 reference example.

(Step S611-1)
The main CPU 300a loads the registered setting values in the setting value buffer.

(Step S611-3)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the registered setting value loaded in step S611-1 is within the normal range. If it is judged to be within the normal range, the process proceeds to step S611-9. If it is judged to be not within the normal range, the process proceeds to step S611-5.

(Step S611-5)
The main CPU 300a sets the gaming machine status flag to 03H (abnormal setting status).

(Step S611-7)
The main CPU 300a sets the setting abnormal state command (sub-command) in the transmission buffer and ends the special symbol winning determination process. When this setting abnormal state command is transmitted to the sub-control board 330, a notification that a setting abnormality has occurred is issued.

(Step S611-9)
The main CPU 300a refers to the big win determination random number judgment table corresponding to the information loaded in step S611-1, and sets the lower limit and upper limit for determining whether a big win or a small win has occurred.

(Step S611-11)
The main CPU 300a compares the jackpot determination random number transferred to the 0th memory unit with the above-mentioned lower limit value and upper limit value, and performs a determination process (big prize lottery) to determine whether a jackpot or small jackpot has been won.

(Step S611-13)
The main CPU 300a sets the result of the determination process in step S611-11 as determination information, and ends the special symbol winning determination process.

Figure 37 is a flowchart explaining the special symbol variable number determination process in the main control board 300 for the Type 1/Type 2 reference example.

(Step S612-1)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the result of the big prize lottery in the step S611 is a big win or a small win. If it is judged to be a big win or a small win, the process proceeds to step S612-3, and if it is judged to be neither a big win nor a small win (a miss), the process proceeds to step S612-5.

(Step S612-3)
The main CPU 300a sets a reach mode determination random number judgment table corresponding to the current game state, the type of big win symbol, the reserved type, and the variable state.

(Step S612-5)
When the hold type of the read-out hold is special 2 hold, the main CPU 300a checks the counter value of the special pattern 2 hold ball count counter, and when the hold type of the read-out hold is special 1 hold, the main CPU 300a checks the counter value of the special pattern 1 hold ball count counter.

(Step S612-7)
The main CPU 300a sets the corresponding reach group determination random number judgment table based on the current game state, the reserved number and reserved type confirmed in the above step S612-5, and determines the reach group (group type) based on the set reach group determination random number judgment table and the reach group determination random number transferred to the 0th memory unit in the above step S610-7.

(Step S612-9)
The main CPU 300a sets a random number judgment table for determining a losing reach mode corresponding to the group type determined in step S612-7.

(Step S612-11)
The main CPU 300a determines a variation mode number based on the reach mode determination random number judgment table set in the above step S612-3 or step S612-9 and the reach mode determination random number transferred to the 0th memory unit in the above step S610-7. Here, a variation pattern random number judgment table is also determined together with the variation mode number.

(Step S612-13)
The main CPU 300a sets in the transmission buffer a fluctuation mode command corresponding to the fluctuation mode number determined in step S612-11 above.

(Step S612-15)
The main CPU 300a determines a fluctuation pattern number based on the fluctuation pattern random number determination table determined in the above step S612-11 and the fluctuation pattern random number transferred to the 0th memory unit in the above step S610-7.

(Step S612-17)
The main CPU 300a sets the variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern number determined in step S612-15 above in the transmission buffer, and ends the special pattern variation number determination process.

Figure 38 is a flowchart explaining the processing during special symbol fluctuation in the main control board 300 for the Type 1/Type 2 reference example. This processing during special symbol fluctuation is executed when the special game management phase is "01H".

(Step S620-1)
The main CPU 300a executes a process of updating the special symbol variation base counter. The special symbol variation base counter is set to a counter value that completes one revolution in a predetermined cycle (e.g., 100 ms). Specifically, when the counter value of the special symbol variation base counter is "0", a predetermined counter value (e.g., 25) is set, and when the counter value is "1" or more, the counter value is updated to a value obtained by subtracting "1" from the current counter value.

(Step S620-3)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the counter value of the special symbol variation base counter updated in the above step S620-1 is "0". If the counter value is "0", the process proceeds to step S620-5, and if the counter value is not "0", the process proceeds to step S620-9.

(Step S620-5)
The main CPU 300a performs a special symbol fluctuation timer update process to subtract a predetermined value from the timer value of the special symbol fluctuation timer set in the above step S610-15.

(Step S620-7)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the timer value of the special symbol fluctuation timer updated in step S620-5 is "0". If the timer value is "0", the process proceeds to step S620-15. If the timer value is not "0", the process proceeds to step S620-9.

(Step S620-9)
The main CPU 300a updates the special symbol display timer that measures the lighting time of each of the 7-segment segments that make up the first special symbol display device 160 and the second special symbol display device 162. Specifically, if the timer value of the special symbol display timer is "0", a predetermined timer value is set, and if the timer value is "1" or greater, the timer value is updated to a value obtained by subtracting "1" from the current timer value.

(Step S620-11)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the timer value of the special symbol display timer is "0". If it judges that the timer value of the special symbol display timer is "0", the process proceeds to step S620-13, and if it judges that the timer value of the special symbol display timer is not "0", the process during the special symbol variation is terminated.

(Step S620-13)
The main CPU 300a updates the counter value of the special symbol display symbol counter to be updated, and ends the special symbol variation process. As a result, each segment constituting the 7-segment display is sequentially lit at predetermined time intervals.

(Step S620-15)
The main CPU 300a updates the special game management phase to "02H".

(Step S620-17)
The main CPU 300a saves the special symbol stop symbol number (counter value) determined in step S610-13 in the target special symbol display symbol counter. As a result, the determined special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 160 or the second special symbol display device 162.

(Step S620-19)
The main CPU 300a sets in the transmission buffer a special symbol stop designation command indicating that a special symbol has been stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 160 or the second special symbol display device 162.

(Step S620-21)
The main CPU 300a sets the special pattern variation stop time, which is the time for which the special pattern is stopped and displayed, in the special game timer, and ends the special pattern variation process.

Figure 39 is a flowchart explaining the special symbol stop symbol display process in the main control board 300 for the Type 1/Type 2 reference example. This special symbol stop symbol display process is executed when the special game management phase is "02H".

(Step S630-1)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the timer value of the special game timer set in the above step S620-21 is "0". If it is judged that the timer value of the special game timer is not "0", the main CPU 300a ends the special symbol stop symbol display process, and if it is judged that the timer value of the special game timer is "0", the process proceeds to step S630-3.

(Step S630-3)
The main CPU 300a checks the result of the big role lottery.

(Step S630-5)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the result of the big prize lottery is a big win or not. If it is judged as a big win, the process proceeds to step S630-19, and if it is judged as not a big win, the process proceeds to step S630-7.

(Step S630-7)
The main CPU 300a executes the number-of-plays management process. Here, a time-saving state flag for identifying whether the game state is a non-time-saving game state or a time-saving game state is loaded, and it is confirmed whether the current game state is a non-time-saving game state or a time-saving game state. If the game state is a time-saving game state, the counter value of the time-saving number-of-plays counter is updated to a value obtained by subtracting "1" from the current counter value. If the counter value becomes "0" as a result of updating the time-saving number-of-plays counter, a time-saving state flag corresponding to the non-time-saving game state is set. As a result, in the time-saving game state, when the special symbol is confirmed a predetermined number of times without winning a jackpot, the game state is shifted to the non-time-saving game state.

(Step S630-9)
The main CPU 300a updates the variable state.

(Step S630-11)
The main CPU 300a sets in the transmission buffer a game state confirmation command at the time of special symbol determination, which indicates the game state when the special symbol is determined.

(Step S630-13)
The main CPU 300a sets in the transmission buffer a number command for transmitting the time-saving number updated in step S630-7 to the sub-control board 330.

(Step S630-15)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the result of the big role lottery is a small win or not. If it is judged to be a small win, the process proceeds to step S630-21, and if it is judged not to be a small win, the process proceeds to step S630-17.

(Step S630-17)
The main CPU 300a updates the special game management phase to "00H" and ends the special symbol stop symbol display process. This ends the special game management process based on the reservation of 1, and if special reservation 1 or special reservation 2 is stored, a process for starting the variable display of the special symbol based on the next reservation is performed.

(Step S630-19)
The main CPU 300a resets (sets) the gaming state to the initial state, that is, the non-time-shortened gaming state.

(Step S630-21)
The main CPU 300a sets data in a special electric role activation RAM set table according to the type of the determined special symbol.

(Step S630-23)
The main CPU 300a performs a process for setting the maximum number of times that the special electric role is operated. Specifically, the data set in the above step S630-21 is referred to, and a predetermined number (counter value corresponding to the type of special symbol = number of rounds) is set as a counter value in the maximum number of times that the special electric role is operated counter. The maximum number of times that the special electric role is operated counter indicates the number of rounds that can be executed in the big role game that will start from now. Meanwhile, the main RAM 300c is provided with a counter for the number of times that the special electric role is continuously operated, and the current number of rounds is managed by adding "1" to the counter value of the counter for the number of times that the special electric role is continuously operated at the start of each round game. Here, a process for resetting (updating to "0") the counter value of the counter for the number of times that the special electric role is continuously operated is also executed with the start of the big role game.

(Step S630-25)
The main CPU 300a refers to the data set in step S630-21 and saves a predetermined opening time as a timer value in the special game timer.

(Step S630-27)
The main CPU 300a sets in the transmission buffer an opening designation command for transmitting the start of a big win game or a small win game to the sub-control board 330. Note that this opening designation command is provided for each opening time, and here, the opening designation command corresponding to the opening time saved in the above step S630-25 is set in the transmission buffer.

(Step S630-29)
If the result of the big win lottery confirmed in step S630-3 is a big win, the main CPU 300a updates the special game management phase to "03H", and if it is a small win, updates the special game management phase to "07H" and ends the special symbol stop symbol display process. This starts the big win game or small win game.

Figure 40 is a flow chart explaining the processing before the opening of the large prize opening in the main control board 300 for the Type 1/Type 2 reference example. This processing before the opening of the large prize opening is executed when the special game management phase is "03H" or "07H".

(Step S640-1)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the timer value of the special game timer is not "0". If it is judged that the timer value of the special game timer is not "0", the main CPU 300a ends the pre-opening process of the special prize opening, and if it is judged that the timer value of the special game timer is "0", the process proceeds to step S640-3.

(Step S640-3)
The main CPU 300a updates the counter value of the special electric device continuous operation count off counter to a value obtained by adding "1" to the current counter value.

(Step S640-5)
The main CPU 300a sets in the transmission buffer a large prize opening designation command for transmitting the start of opening of the first large prize opening 126 and the second large prize opening 128 (start of a round of play) to the sub-control board 330.

(Step S641)
The main CPU 300a executes a special prize opening/closing switching process, which will be described later.

(Step S640-7)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the special game management phase is 07H, that is, whether a small win game is being played. If it is judged that the special game management phase is 07H, the process proceeds to step S640-9, and if it is judged that the special game management phase is not 07H, the process proceeds to step S640-13.

(Step S640-9)
The main CPU 300a judges whether it is the start of the first round of play based on the counter value of the counter for the number of times the special electric device is continuously operated. If it is judged that it is the start of the first round of play, the process proceeds to step S640-11, and if it is judged that it is not the start of the first round of play, the process proceeds to step S640-13.

(Step S640-11)
The main CPU 300a turns on the valid period flag, which enables the entry of the gaming ball into the specific area 140b when the small win game starts.

(Step S640-13)
The main CPU 300a updates the special game management phase to a value obtained by adding 01H to the current value ("04H" or "08H"), and ends the pre-opening process for the large prize opening.

Figure 41 is a flowchart explaining the large prize opening/closing switching process in the main control board 300 for the one-type two-type reference example.

(Step S641-1)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the counter value of the special electric device opening/closing switching count counter is the upper limit value of the special electric device opening/closing switching count (the number of times the first large prize opening 126 and the second large prize opening 128 are opened and closed during one round of play). If it is judged that the counter value is the upper limit value, the main CPU 300a ends the large prize opening opening/closing switching process, and if it is judged that the counter value is not the upper limit value, the process proceeds to step S641-3.

(Step S641-3)
The main CPU 300a refers to the data in the special electric device operation RAM set table and extracts solenoid control data for controlling the energization of the first large prize opening solenoid 126c or the second large prize opening solenoid 128c based on the counter value of the special electric device opening/closing switching count off counter, as well as timer data which is the energization time or de-energization time of the first large prize opening solenoid 126c or the second large prize opening solenoid 128c.

(Step S641-5)
The main CPU 300a executes a large prize opening solenoid energization control process to start energization of the first large prize opening solenoid 126c or the second large prize opening solenoid 128c or to stop energization of the first large prize opening solenoid 126c or the second large prize opening solenoid 128c based on the solenoid control data extracted in the above step S641-3. By executing this large prize opening solenoid energization control process, the start or stop of energization of the first large prize opening solenoid 126c or the second large prize opening solenoid 128c is controlled in the above steps S400-31 and S400-33.

(Step S641-7)
The main CPU 300a saves the timer value based on the timer data extracted in step S641-3 in the special game timer. The timer value saved in the special game timer here is the maximum opening time of the first large prize opening 126 and the second large prize opening 128 in one time.

(Step S641-9)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the first large prize opening solenoid 126c or the second large prize opening solenoid 128c is in the energization start state, that is, whether the control process to start energization of the first large prize opening solenoid 126c or the second large prize opening solenoid 128c has been performed in the above step S641-5. If it is judged to be in the energization start state, the process proceeds to step S641-11, and if it is judged not to be in the energization start state, the large prize opening opening opening/closing switching process is terminated.

(Step S641-11)
The main CPU 300a updates the counter value of the special electric device opening/closing switching count counter to a value obtained by adding "1" to the current counter value, and ends the large prize opening opening/closing switching process.

Figure 42 is a flowchart explaining the special prize opening control process in the main control board 300 for the Type 1/Type 2 reference example. This special prize opening control process is executed when the special game management phase is "04H" or "08H".

(Step S650-1)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the timer value of the special game timer saved in the above step S641-7 is "0". If it is judged that the timer value of the special game timer is not "0", the process proceeds to step S650-5, and if it is judged that the timer value of the special game timer is "0", the process proceeds to step S650-3.

(Step S650-3)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the counter value of the special electric role opening/closing switching counter is the upper limit value of the special electric role opening/closing switching count. If it is judged that the counter value is the upper limit value, the process proceeds to step S650-7, and if it is judged that the counter value is not the upper limit value, the process proceeds to step S641.

(Step S641)
In the above step S650-3, if it is determined that the counter value of the special electric role opening/closing switching count counter is not the upper limit value of the special electric role opening/closing switching count, the main CPU 300a executes the processing of the above step S641.

(Step S650-5)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the counter value of the large prize opening winning ball counter updated in the above step S500-9 has reached a specified number, that is, whether the same number of game balls as the maximum number of winnings in one round have entered the first large prize opening 126 or the second large prize opening 128. As a result, if it is judged that the specified number has not been reached, the large prize opening opening opening control process is terminated, and if it is judged that the specified number has been reached, the process proceeds to step S650-7.

(Step S650-7)
The main CPU 300a executes a large prize opening closing process required to stop the energization of the first large prize opening solenoid 126c and the second large prize opening solenoid 128c to close the first large prize opening 126 and the second large prize opening 128. As a result, the first large prize opening 126 and the second large prize opening 128 are closed.

(Step S650-9)
The main CPU 300a saves the effective time (interval time) for closing the large prize opening in the special game timer.

(Step S650-11)
The main CPU 300a updates the special game management phase to a value obtained by adding 01H to the current value ("05H" or "09H").

(Step S650-13)
The main CPU 300a sets a large prize opening closure designation command indicating that the first large prize opening 126 and the second large prize opening 128 have been closed in the transmission buffer, and terminates the large prize opening opening control process.

Figure 43 is a flow chart explaining the large prize opening closure activation process in the main control board 300 for the Type 1/Type 2 reference example. This large prize opening closure activation process is executed when the special game management phase is "05H" or "09H".

(Step S660-1)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the timer value of the special game timer saved in the above step S650-9 is not "0". If it is judged that the timer value of the special game timer is not "0", the main CPU 300a ends the special prize opening closure valid processing, and if it is judged that the timer value of the special game timer is "0", the processing proceeds to step S660-3.

(Step S660-3)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the counter value of the special electric device continuous operation number cut counter matches the counter value of the special electric device maximum operation number cut counter, that is, whether a preset number of rounds have been played. If it is judged that the counter value of the special electric device continuous operation number cut counter matches the counter value of the special electric device maximum operation number cut counter, the process proceeds to step S660-9, and if it is judged that they do not match, the process proceeds to step S660-5.

(Step S660-5)
The main CPU 300a updates the special game management phase to "03H". Note that when the special game management phase is "09H", that is, during control of the small win game, the number of rounds of the small win game is "1", so that the result of step S660-3 is always YES, and the process does not proceed to that step.

(Step S660-7)
The main CPU 300a saves the predetermined special prize opening closing time in the special game timer and ends the special prize opening closing validity process, thereby starting the next round of games.

(Step S660-9)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the special game management phase is 09H, that is, whether a small win game is being played. If it is judged that the special game management phase is 09H, the process proceeds to step S660-11, and if it is judged that the special game management phase is not 09H, the process proceeds to step S660-21.

(Step S660-11)
The main CPU 300a judges whether all the game balls that entered the second large prize opening 128 have been discharged. Here, when the value obtained by subtracting the total number of game balls that entered the specific area 140b and the non-specific area 140c from the number of game balls that entered the second large prize opening 128 becomes 0, it is judged that the discharge is completed. If it is judged that the discharge is completed, the process proceeds to step S660-13, and if it is judged that the discharge is not completed, the large prize opening closure valid process is terminated. Note that if the judgment result that the discharge is not completed is continuously derived for a certain period of time, an error process is performed.

(Step S660-13)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the specific area entry flag is on. If it is judged that the specific area entry flag is on, the process proceeds to step S660-15, and if it is judged that the specific area entry flag is not on, the process proceeds to step S660-21.

(Step S660-15)
The main CPU 300a turns off the specific area entry flag.

(Step S660-17)
The main CPU 300a checks the type of small winning symbol and sets a predetermined number (the counter value corresponding to the type of special symbol = the number of rounds minus 1, i.e., the number of rounds in the big winning game) as the counter value in the special electric device maximum operation count cut-off counter.

(Step S660-19)
The main CPU 300a sets the special game management phase to 03H, and ends the large prize opening closure validation process.

(Step S660-21)
The main CPU 300a executes an ending time setting process for saving the ending time in a special game timer.

(Step S660-23)
The main CPU 300a updates the special game management phase to a value obtained by adding 01H to the current value ("06H" or "0AH").

(Step S660-25)
The main CPU 300a sets an ending designation command indicating the start of the ending in the transmission buffer, and ends the large prize opening closure activation process.

Figure 44 is a flowchart explaining the large prize opening end wait process in the main control board 300 for the Type 1/Type 2 reference example. This large prize opening end wait process is executed when the special game management phase is "06H" or "0AH".

(Step S670-1)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the timer value of the special game timer saved in the above step S660-7 is not "0". As a result, if it is judged that the timer value of the special game timer is not "0", the main CPU 300a ends the waiting process for the end of the special winning port, and if it is judged that the timer value of the special game timer is "0", the process proceeds to step S670-3.

(Step S670-3)
The main CPU 300a executes a state setting process to set the game state after the big win game ends. Here, the game state after the big win game ends is set based on the type of special symbol that triggered the execution of the big win game or the small win game. Specifically, when the special symbol is the special symbol A or a, the game state is set to the time-saving game state and the number of time-saving times is set to 1. When the special symbol is the special symbol B, C, b, or c, the game state is set to the time-saving game state and the number of time-saving times is set to 7.

In addition, if a small win is won but the game ball does not enter the specific area 140b during the small win game, the game state after the small win game is maintained as the game state before the small win game. Alternatively, if the game ball does not enter the specific area 140b during the small win game, the game state after the small win game may be set to a non-time-saving game state. Also, if the game ball does not enter the specific area 140b during the small win game, the game state after the small win game may be set to a time-saving game state and the number of time-saving times may be set to a predetermined number. Alternatively, the setting of the game state when the game ball does not enter the specific area 140b and the setting of the number of time-saving times may be different depending on the type of small win pattern.

In addition, here, a process is also performed to set the change state after the end of the big win game or the small win game based on the big win pattern that triggered the execution of the big win game or the small win pattern that triggered the execution of the small win game, and the setting value being set.

(Step S670-5)
The main CPU 300a sets in the transmission buffer a game state change designation command for transmitting the game state and the variable state that are set after the end of the big role game.

(Step S670-7)
The main CPU 300a sets in the transmission buffer a number designation command corresponding to the time-saving number saved in step S670-3 above.

(Step S670-9)
The main CPU 300a updates the special game management phase to "00H" and ends the waiting process for the end of the special winning slot. As a result, if the special 1 reserve or special 2 reserve is stored, the variable display of the special symbol is resumed.

Figure 45 is a diagram explaining the normal game management phase in the Type 1/Type 2 Reference Example. As already explained, in the Type 1/Type 2 Reference Example, the processing related to the normal game triggered by the passage of the gaming ball through the gate 124 is executed stepwise and repeatedly, and the main control board 300 manages each processing related to such normal games by the normal game management phase.

As shown in FIG. 45, the main ROM 300b stores a plurality of normal game control modules for controlling the execution of normal games, and each of these normal game control modules is associated with a normal game management phase. Specifically, when the normal game management phase is "00H", a module for executing "normal symbol change waiting process" is called, when the normal game management phase is "01H", a module for executing "normal symbol change process" is called, when the normal game management phase is "02H", a module for executing "normal symbol stop symbol display process" is called, when the normal game management phase is "03H", a module for executing "normal electric role winning opening pre-processing" is called, when the normal game management phase is "04H", a module for executing "normal electric role winning opening opening control process" is called, when the normal game management phase is "05H", a module for executing "normal electric role winning opening closing valid process" is called, when the normal game management phase is "06H", a module for executing "normal electric role winning opening end wait process" is called.

Figure 46 is a flowchart explaining the normal game management process (step S700) in the main control board 300 for the Type 1/Type 2 reference example.

(Step S700-1)
The main CPU 300a loads the normal game management phase.

(Step S700-3)
The main CPU 300a selects the normal game control module corresponding to the normal game management phase loaded in step S700-1.

(Step S700-5)
The main CPU 300a calls the normal game control module selected in step S700-3 above, and starts processing.

(Step S700-7)
The main CPU 300a loads a normal game timer that manages the control time of the normal game.

Figure 47 is a flowchart explaining the normal symbol change waiting process in the main control board 300 for the Type 1/Type 2 reference example. This normal symbol change waiting process is executed when the normal game management phase is "00H".

(Step S710-1)
The main CPU 300a loads the counter value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter and judges whether the counter value is "0", that is, whether the normal symbol reserved is "0". If it is judged that the counter value is "0", the normal symbol change waiting process is terminated, and if it is judged that the counter value is not "0", the process proceeds to step S710-3.

(Step S710-3)
The main CPU 300a transfers the regular reserved balls (win-determining random numbers) stored in the first to fourth storage sections of the regular reserved ball storage area in blocks to the storage section with the next smaller ordinal number. Specifically, the regular reserved balls stored in the second to fourth storage sections are transferred to the first to third storage sections. The main RAM 300c is also provided with a 0th storage section to be processed, and the regular reserved balls stored in the 1st storage section are transferred to the 0th storage section. In addition, in this regular pattern storage area shift process, the counter value of the regular pattern reserved ball count counter is decremented by "1," and a regular reserved reduction command indicating that the regular reserved balls have been decremented by "1" is set in the transmission buffer.

(Step S710-5)
The main CPU 300a loads the winning determination random number transferred to the 0th memory unit, selects a winning determination random number judgment table corresponding to the current game state, performs a regular symbol lottery, and executes a regular symbol winning determination process that stores the lottery result.

(Step S710-7)
The main CPU 300a saves the normal symbol stop symbol number corresponding to the result of the normal symbol lottery in step S710-5. In the type 1 type 2 reference example, the normal symbol display 168 is composed of one LED lamp, and in the case of a win, the normal symbol display 168 is turned on, and in the case of a loss, the normal symbol display 168 is turned off. The normal symbol stop symbol number determined here indicates whether or not the normal symbol display 168 is ultimately turned on. For example, in the case of a win, "0" is determined as the normal symbol stop symbol number, and in the case of a loss, "1" is determined as the normal symbol stop symbol number.

(Step S710-9)
The main CPU 300a checks the current game state, and selects and sets the corresponding normal symbol variation time data table.

(Step S710-11)
The main CPU 300a determines the normal symbol variation time based on the winning determination random number transferred to the 0th memory unit in the above step S710-3 and the normal symbol variation time data table set in the above step S710-9.

(Step S710-13)
The main CPU 300a saves the normal symbol variation time determined in the above step S710-11 in the normal game timer.

(Step S710-15)
The main CPU 300a executes a process of setting a normal pattern display pattern counter in order to start the variable display of normal patterns in the normal pattern display 168. When the counter value is set to, for example, "0" in the normal pattern display pattern counter, the normal pattern display 168 is controlled to be turned on, and when the counter value is set to "1", the normal pattern display 168 is controlled to be turned off. Here, a predetermined counter value is set in the normal pattern display pattern counter at the start of the variable display of normal patterns.

(Step S710-17)
The main CPU 300a sets a regular map reservation designation command indicating the number of regular map reservations stored in the regular map reservation memory area in a transmission buffer.

(Step S710-19)
The main CPU 300a sets a normal pattern designation command in the transmission buffer based on the normal pattern stopping pattern number determined in step S710-7 above, i.e., the pattern type (winning pattern or losing pattern) determined by the normal pattern winning judgment process.

(Step S710-21)
The main CPU 300a updates the normal game management phase to "01H" and ends the normal pattern change waiting process.

Figure 48 is a flowchart explaining the processing during normal symbol fluctuation in the main control board 300 for the Type 1/Type 2 reference example. This processing during normal symbol fluctuation is executed when the normal game management phase is "01H".

(Step S720-1)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the timer value of the normal game timer saved in the above step S710-13 is "0". If the timer value is "0", the process proceeds to step S720-9, and if the timer value is not "0", the process proceeds to step S720-3.

(Step S720-3)
The main CPU 300a updates the normal symbol display timer that measures the light-on and light-off times of the normal symbol display 168. Specifically, if the timer value of the normal symbol display timer is "0", a predetermined timer value is set, and if the timer value is "1" or more, the timer value is updated to a value obtained by subtracting "1" from the current timer value.

(Step S720-5)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the timer value of the normal symbol display timer is "0". As a result, if it is judged that the timer value of the normal symbol display timer is "0", the process proceeds to step S720-7, and if it is judged that the timer value of the normal symbol display timer is not "0", the process during the normal symbol variation is terminated.

(Step S720-7)
The main CPU 300a updates the counter value of the normal symbol display symbol counter. Here, if the counter value of the normal symbol display symbol counter is a counter value indicating that the normal symbol display 168 is turned off, it is updated to a counter value indicating that the normal symbol display 168 is turned on, and if the counter value is a counter value indicating that the normal symbol display 168 is turned on, it is updated to a counter value indicating that the normal symbol display 168 is turned off, and the normal symbol variation process is terminated. As a result, the normal symbol display 168 is turned on and off repeatedly (blinks) at predetermined intervals over the normal symbol variation time.

(Step S720-9)
The main CPU 300a saves the normal symbol stop symbol number (counter value) determined in step S710-7 in the normal symbol display symbol counter. As a result, the normal symbol display 168 is finally controlled to be turned on or off, and the result of the normal symbol lottery is announced.

(Step S720-11)
The main CPU 300a sets a normal pattern variation stop time, which is the time for stopping and displaying the normal pattern, in a normal game timer.

(Step S720-13)
The main CPU 300a sets a normal symbol stop command, which indicates that the stopped display of the normal symbols has begun, in the transmission buffer.

(Step S720-15)
The main CPU 300a updates the normal game management phase to "02H" and ends the normal pattern variation processing.

Figure 49 is a flowchart explaining the normal symbol stop symbol display process in the main control board 300 for the Type 1/Type 2 reference example. This normal symbol stop symbol display process is executed when the normal game management phase is "02H".

(Step S730-1)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the timer value of the normal game timer set in the above step S720-11 is not "0". As a result, if it is judged that the timer value of the normal game timer is not "0", the normal symbol stop symbol display process is terminated, and if it is judged that the timer value of the normal game timer is "0", the process proceeds to step S730-3.

(Step S730-3)
The main CPU 300a checks the result of the regular drawing.

(Step S730-5)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the result of the normal drawing is a win or not. If it is judged to be a win, the process proceeds to step S730-9, and if it is judged to be a no win (no win), the process proceeds to step S730-7.

(Step S730-7)
The main CPU 300a updates the normal game management phase to "00H" and ends the normal stop symbol display process. This ends the normal game management process based on one normal symbol reservation, and if a normal symbol reservation is stored, processing is performed to start the variable display of the next reserved normal symbol.

(Step S730-9)
The main CPU 300a refers to the data in the opening/closing control pattern table, and saves the time before normal power opening in the normal game timer as a timer value.

(Step S730-11)
The main CPU 300a updates the normal game management phase to "03H" and ends the normal stop symbol display process. This starts the opening/closing control of the second start port 122.

Figure 50 is a flow chart explaining the normal electric device winning opening pre-opening processing in the main control board 300 for the Type 1/Type 2 reference example. This normal electric device winning opening pre-opening processing is executed when the normal game management phase is "03H".

(Step S740-1)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the timer value of the normal game timer is not "0". As a result, if it is judged that the timer value of the normal game timer is not "0", the normal electric role winning opening pre-opening process is terminated, and if it is judged that the timer value of the normal game timer is "0", the process proceeds to step S741.

(Step S741)
The main CPU 300a executes a normal electric device prize opening opening/closing switching process, which will be described later.

(Step S740-3)
The main CPU 300a updates the normal game management phase to "04H" and ends the processing before opening the normal electric device winning opening.

Figure 51 is a flowchart explaining the normal electric role winning opening/closing switching process in the main control board 300 for the Type 1/Type 2 reference example.

(Step S741-1)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the counter value of the normal electric role opening/closing switching count off counter is the upper limit value of the normal electric role opening/closing switching count (the number of times the movable piece 122b opens and closes during one opening/closing control). If it is judged that the counter value is the upper limit value, the normal electric role winning port opening/closing switching process is terminated, and if it is judged that the counter value is not the upper limit value, the process proceeds to step S741-3.

(Step S741-3)
The main CPU 300a refers to the data in the opening/closing control pattern table and extracts solenoid control data (energization control data or energization stop control data) for controlling the energization of the normal electric role solenoid 122c based on the counter value of the normal electric role opening/closing switching count off counter, and timer data which is the energization time (solenoid energization time) or energization stop time (normal power closing effective time = pause time) of the normal electric role solenoid 122c.

(Step S741-5)
The main CPU 300a executes a normal electric role solenoid energization control process to start energizing the normal electric role solenoid 122c or to stop energizing the normal electric role solenoid 122c based on the solenoid control data extracted in the above step S741-3. By executing this normal electric role solenoid energization control process, the normal electric role solenoid 122c is controlled to start or stop energizing in the above step S400-31 and step S400-33.

(Step S741-7)
The main CPU 300a saves the timer value based on the timer data extracted in step S741-3 in the normal game timer. The timer value saved in the normal game timer here is the maximum opening time of the second start hole 122 once.

(Step S741-9)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the normal electric role solenoid 122c is in the energization start state, that is, whether the control process to start energization of the normal electric role solenoid 122c has been performed in the above step S741-5. As a result, if it is judged to be in the energization start state, the process proceeds to step S741-11, and if it is judged not to be in the energization start state, the normal electric role winning port opening/closing switching process is terminated.

(Step S741-11)
The main CPU 300a updates the counter value of the normal electric role opening/closing switching count counter to a value obtained by adding "1" to the current counter value.

Figure 52 is a flowchart explaining the normal electric device winning opening control process in the main control board 300 for the Type 1/Type 2 reference example. This normal electric device winning opening control process is executed when the normal game management phase is "04H".

(Step S750-1)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the timer value of the normal game timer saved in the above step S741-7 is not "0". As a result, if it is judged that the timer value of the normal game timer is not "0", the process proceeds to step S750-5, and if it is judged that the timer value of the normal game timer is "0", the process proceeds to step S750-3.

(Step S750-3)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the counter value of the normal electric role opening/closing switching counter is the upper limit value of the normal electric role opening/closing switching count. If it is judged that the counter value is the upper limit value, the process proceeds to step S750-7, and if it is judged that the counter value is not the upper limit value, the process proceeds to step S741.

(Step S741)
In the above step S750-3, if it is determined that the counter value of the normal electric role opening/closing switching count counter is not the upper limit value of the normal electric role opening/closing switching count, the main CPU 300a executes the processing of the above step S741.

(Step S750-5)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the counter value of the normal electric device winning ball counter updated in the above step S530-9 has reached a specified number, that is, whether the same number of game balls as the maximum number of winning balls during one opening and closing control have entered the second starting hole 122. As a result, if it is judged that the specified number has not been reached, the normal electric device winning hole opening control process is terminated, and if it is judged that the specified number has been reached, the process proceeds to step S750-7.

(Step S750-7)
The main CPU 300a executes a normal electric role closing process required to stop the energization of the normal electric role solenoid 122c and close the second start port 122. As a result, the second start port 122 is in a closed state.

(Step S750-9)
The main CPU 300a saves the normal power effective state time in the normal game timer.

(Step S750-11)
The main CPU 300a updates the normal game management phase to "05H" and ends the normal electric device winning port opening control process.

Figure 53 is a flow chart explaining the normal electric device winning hole closure enable processing in the main control board 300 for the Type 1/Type 2 reference example. This normal electric device winning hole closure enable processing is executed when the normal game management phase is "05H".

(Step S760-1)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the timer value of the normal game timer saved in the above step S750-9 is not "0". As a result, if it is judged that the timer value of the normal game timer is not "0", the normal electric role winning port closure valid processing is terminated, and if it is judged that the timer value of the normal game timer is "0", the processing proceeds to step S760-3.

(Step S760-3)
The main CPU 300a saves the normal power end wait time in the normal game timer.

(Step S760-5)
The main CPU 300a updates the normal game management phase to "06H" and ends the normal electric device winning port closure validation processing.

Figure 54 is a flowchart explaining the normal electric role winning port end wait process in the main control board 300 for the Type 1/Type 2 reference example. This normal electric role winning port end wait process is executed when the normal game management phase is "06H".

(Step S770-1)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the timer value of the normal game timer saved in the above step S760-3 is not "0". As a result, if it is judged that the timer value of the normal game timer is not "0", the normal electric role winning port end wait process is terminated, and if it is judged that the timer value of the normal game timer is "0", the process proceeds to step S770-3.

(Step S770-3)
The main CPU 300a updates the normal game management phase to "00H" and ends the normal electric role winning port end wait process. As a result, if a normal symbol reservation is stored, the variable display of the normal symbol is resumed.

As described above, the main control board 300 executes various processes to allow the special game and normal game to proceed, and while these games are in progress, the sub-control board 330 performs control to execute various effects based on commands sent from the main control board 300. Examples of effects are shown below.

<Example of performance>
FIG. 55 is a diagram for explaining an example of the variation performance of the no-reach variation pattern according to the reference performance example. As described above, when the main control board 300 performs the big role lottery, during the variation display of the special symbol, that is, during the variation time of the special symbol, a variation performance is executed to notify the result of the big role lottery. In this variation performance, various background images are displayed on the main performance display unit 200a, and the performance patterns 210a, 210b, and 210c are displayed superimposed on the background images. During the variation performance, sound is output from the audio output device 206 in accordance with the image displayed on the main performance display unit 200a, and the performance lighting device 204 is controlled to light up, and the performance role device 202 is controlled to move, but detailed explanations are omitted here.

The variable performances in the reference performance examples are broadly divided into a no-reach variable pattern and a reach variable pattern. In the variable performance of the no-reach variable pattern, a background image (not shown) is displayed on the main performance display unit 200a, and the performance patterns 210a, 210b, and 210c are displayed in a variable manner superimposed on this background image. For example, as shown in FIG. 55(a), the performance patterns 210a, 210b, and 210c are displayed stationary in a combination that indicates that the big role lottery result was a miss. In this state, when a new special pattern is displayed, as the display of the special pattern starts, the three performance patterns 210a, 210b, and 210c start to display (scroll) as shown in FIG. 55(b). Note that the downward white arrow in the figure indicates that the performance patterns 210a, 210b, and 210c are displayed by scrolling in the vertical direction.

Then, as shown in FIG. 55(c), first, the effect symbol 210a is displayed as a stopped symbol, and then, as shown in FIG. 55(d), the effect symbol 210c, which is different from the effect symbol 210a, is displayed as a stopped symbol. Then, at approximately the same timing as the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 160 or the second special symbol display device 162 after the variable display of the special symbol is finished, the effect symbol 210b is displayed as a stopped symbol, as shown in FIG. 55(e), and the result of the lottery for the big prize is notified to the player based on the final stopped display state of the three effect symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c at this time.

Figure 56 is a diagram for explaining an example of a normal reach fluctuation pattern fluctuation performance according to a performance reference example. In the performance reference example, the reach fluctuation pattern is broadly divided into a normal reach fluctuation pattern, an advanced reach fluctuation pattern, and a pseudo-continuous reach fluctuation pattern. In the normal reach fluctuation pattern fluctuation performance, similar to the non-reach fluctuation pattern fluctuation performance, the fluctuation display of the performance patterns 210a, 210b, and 210c begins with the start of the fluctuation display of the special pattern, and as shown in Figure 56 (a), the performance pattern 210a is first displayed frozen. After that, as shown in Figure 56 (b), the performance pattern 210c, which is the same as the performance pattern 210a, is displayed frozen.

In this way, when the same performance symbols 210a, 210c are displayed in a reach state in the main performance display section 200a, as shown in FIG. 56(c), "reach" is displayed superimposed on the performance symbols 210a, 210c in the main performance display section 200a. Note that there are multiple types of reach states, and the same performance symbols 210a, 210c with any of the numbers "1" to "9" written on them are displayed in a stopped state. After that, as shown in FIG. 56(d), the shape of the performance symbols 210a, 210c is changed from that before the reach state and the variable display continues. Then, as shown in FIG. 56(e), finally, a performance symbol 210b different from the performance symbols 210a, 210c is displayed in a stopped state, and the player is notified that the result of the big role lottery was a miss.

Figure 57 is a diagram for explaining an example of the variation presentation of the development reach variation pattern at the time of a miss according to the performance reference example, and Figure 58 is a diagram for explaining an example of the variation presentation of the development reach variation pattern at the time of a big win according to the performance reference example. As shown in Figures 57(a)-(d) and 58(a)-(d), the variation presentation of the development reach variation pattern is similar to the variation presentation of the normal reach variation pattern, in which the performance patterns 210a and 210c are displayed in a reach state in the main performance display section 200a, and then a reach development presentation in which a predetermined development image (video) is played and displayed is executed. In this reach development presentation, for example, as shown in Figures 57(e) and 58(e), a mission is displayed on the main performance display section 200a, and as shown in Figures 57(f), (g) and 58(f), (g), an image toward the achievement of the mission is displayed.

Here, the development images for reach development effects are broadly divided into miss patterns and big win patterns, and in the development image for the miss pattern, as shown in FIG. 57(h), an image indicating failure of the mission is finally displayed, and then, as shown in FIG. 57(i), the performance patterns 210a, 210b, and 210c are displayed in a stopped combination to indicate a miss. On the other hand, in the development image for the big win pattern, as shown in FIG. 58(h), an image indicating success of the mission is finally displayed, and then, as shown in FIG. 58(i), the performance patterns 210a, 210b, and 210c are displayed in a stopped combination to indicate a big win.

The reach development effects include, for example, mission effects in which development images of mission challenges are displayed, and battle effects in which development images of friendly characters and enemy characters battling each other are displayed, as described above. The mission effects have multiple execution patterns with different mission contents, and the battle effects have multiple execution patterns with different characters appearing and fighting methods. As described above, the execution patterns of the mission effects are broadly divided into big win patterns in which the mission is accomplished and failure patterns in which the mission is failed, and the execution patterns of the battle effects are similarly broadly divided into big win patterns in which the friendly character triumphs over the enemy character and failure patterns in which the friendly character is defeated by the enemy character.

The big win pattern and the losing pattern are composed of the same content until the end of the performance, and differ in whether the friendly character ultimately wins or loses, or whether the mission is accomplished or not. Therefore, during the reach development performance, the player cannot distinguish the result of the big role lottery until the end of the variable performance, which gives the player a sense of expectation of a big win.

The big win pattern is selected only if the big win lottery result is a big win, and the miss pattern is selected only if the big win lottery result is a miss. However, the reach development effect may be executed twice in one variable performance, in which case the first reach development effect is executed in a miss pattern, and the second reach development effect is executed in either a miss pattern or a big win pattern. The flow of the performance when the reach development effect is executed twice in one variable performance is explained below.

Figure 59 is a diagram illustrating an example of a variable performance when the reach development performance relating to the reference performance example is executed twice. For example, after performance patterns 210a, 210c are displayed in a reach state, a mission performance is executed as shown in Figures 59(a) and (b). Up to this point, there is no difference from the case where the reach development performance is executed only once in one variable performance, but immediately after it is notified that the mission has not been completed, "REACH UP" is displayed on the main performance display section 200a as shown in Figure 59(c).

Then, as shown in FIG. 59(d), the main performance display section 200a displays a battle performance development image, and the second reach development performance starts. This battle performance development image shows a battle between an ally character and an enemy character, and when a jackpot is won, as shown in FIG. 59(e), the ally character finally wins against the enemy character, and as shown in FIG. 59(f), the performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c are displayed in a stopped combination to indicate a jackpot. On the other hand, when a jackpot is lost, as shown in FIG. 59(g), the ally character finally loses to the enemy character, and as shown in FIG. 59(h), the performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c are displayed in a stopped combination to indicate a loss.

Figure 60 is a diagram for explaining an example of the pseudo-successive reach fluctuation pattern fluctuation performance according to the performance reference example. As shown in Figure 60 (a), when the display of the fluctuation of the performance patterns 210a, 210b, and 210c starts, the performance patterns 210a, 210b, and 210c are temporarily stopped and displayed in one of multiple types of pseudo patterns that have been set up in advance, as shown in Figure 60 (b). In this pseudo pattern, for example, the same performance patterns 210a and 210b and the performance pattern 210c with a number "2" larger than these performance patterns 210a and 210b are temporarily stopped and displayed.

When the performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c are temporarily stopped in a pseudo mode, the display of the changing performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c is resumed, as shown in FIG. 60(c). In other words, the pseudo mode can be said to indicate a re-changing display of the performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c. After that, the performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c are temporarily stopped again in a pseudo mode, as shown in FIG. 60(d).

Then, as shown in FIG. 60(e), when the display of the varying effect symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c resumes, as shown in FIG. 60(f), the effect symbols 210a and 210c are displayed in a reach state, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 60(g)-(i), the reach development effect is executed in the same manner as the developed reach variation pattern, and the result of the big prize lottery is notified to the player.

In this way, the pseudo-continuous reach fluctuation pattern's fluctuation performance differs from that of the developed reach fluctuation pattern in the content until the performance patterns 210a, 210c reach the state, and after the state is reached, the fluctuation performance proceeds in the same way as the developed reach fluctuation pattern.

In addition, in the pseudo-continuous reach fluctuation pattern, a plurality of fluctuation display patterns of the performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c until the reach state is reached are provided, and the number of tentative stop displays of the performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c, in other words, the number of times that the performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c are displayed, differs for each fluctuation display pattern. This fluctuation display pattern is determined by the fluctuation mode command, and the selection ratio of the fluctuation mode command when the jackpot is won and when it is lost is set so that the more the number of tentative stop displays (fluctuation displays) of the performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c, the higher the possibility (hereinafter referred to as "reliability") that a jackpot will ultimately be announced.

Specifically, if the result of the big role lottery is a big win, the selection ratio of the variable mode command with a large number of variable display counts is set higher than the selection ratio of the variable mode command with a small number of variable display counts, and if the result of the big role lottery is a loss, the selection ratio of the variable mode command with a small number of variable display counts is set higher than the selection ratio of the variable mode command with a large number of variable display counts.

In addition, the main control board 300 is set so that the reliability of the pseudo-successive reach fluctuation pattern is higher than the reliability of the extended reach fluctuation pattern. Therefore, the reliability is indicated by the number of tentative stop displays (fluctuating displays) of the performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c, and the player will watch the progress of the performance while hoping for more tentative stop displays (fluctuating displays) of the performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c.

The execution pattern of the above-mentioned variable performance is determined and controlled by the sub-control board 330 based on the variable command determined by the main control board 300. In other words, it can be said that the execution pattern of the variable performance is determined in cooperation between the main control board 300 and the sub-control board 330.

Figure 61 is a diagram explaining the variable performance determination table for the performance reference example, where Figure 61 (a) shows the first half variable performance determination table, and Figure 61 (b) shows the second half variable performance determination table. As described above, when the main control board 300 performs a big role lottery, a variable command is determined based on the result of the big role lottery, and each determined command is sent to the sub-control board 330. When the sub-control board 330 receives a variable mode command, it obtains a random number of 1 from the range of 0 to 249, and refers to the first half variable performance determination table to determine the execution pattern of the variable performance of the first half based on the obtained random number and the received variable mode command. Also, when it receives a variable pattern command, it obtains a random number of 1 from the range of 0 to 249, and refers to the second half variable performance determination table to determine the execution pattern of the variable performance of the second half based on the obtained random number and the received variable pattern command. Note that Figure 61 shows only a part of the first half variable performance determination table and the second half variable performance determination table.

As shown in FIG. 61, according to the first half variable performance decision table, a selection ratio for the execution pattern of the first half variable performance is set for each variable mode number (variation mode command), and according to the second half variable performance decision table, a selection ratio for the execution pattern of the second half variable performance is set for each variable pattern number (variation pattern command). Then, one variable performance is executed by combining and executing the execution patterns of the first and second half variable performances that have been determined.

The no-reach fluctuation pattern fluctuation performance is executed when "none" is determined as the execution pattern of the first half, indicating that the first half fluctuation performance is not executed, and "normal miss 1", "normal miss 2", "special miss 1", or "special miss 2" corresponding to the no-reach fluctuation pattern is determined as the execution pattern of the second half. For example, when a fluctuation mode command corresponding to the fluctuation mode number "01H", indicating that the first half fluctuation performance is not executed, is received, the sub-control board 330 always determines "none" as the execution pattern of the first half. In addition, at this time, the selection ratio is set in the second half fluctuation performance determination table so that only one of "normal miss 1", "normal miss 2", "special miss 1", or "special miss 2" is determined as the fluctuation pattern command that can be received at the same time. Therefore, by determining "none" as the execution pattern of the first half and determining "normal miss 1", "normal miss 2", "special miss 1", or "special miss 2" as the execution pattern of the second half, the execution pattern of the fluctuation performance is determined to be the no-reach fluctuation pattern described above.

On the other hand, the reach fluctuation pattern fluctuation performance is executed when a pattern other than "none" is determined as the execution pattern for the first half, and one of the reach development performances (shown as developments 1 to 5 in the figure) is determined as the execution pattern for the second half. In other words, when the reach fluctuation pattern fluctuation performance is executed in the main performance display unit 200a, a fluctuation mode command corresponding to a fluctuation mode number other than the fluctuation mode number = 01H is always received, and a fluctuation pattern command corresponding to a fluctuation pattern number that determines one of developments 1 to 5 is received.

Here, in FIG. 61(a), "Normal Reach 1" and "Normal Reach 2" in the execution pattern of the first half respectively indicate the background image and the variable display pattern of the performance symbols 210a, 210b, 210c displayed on the main performance display section 200a until the performance symbols 210a, 210b, 210c reach the reach state, or more specifically, until the reach development performance starts, among the variable performances of the normal reach variable pattern. These image patterns are designed in advance to match the variable display time of the special symbol associated with the variable mode number, and for example, when "Normal Reach 1" is determined, the images shown in FIG. 56(a) to (d) will be displayed on the main performance display section 200a.

In addition, in FIG. 61(a), "pseudo 2a" and the like in the execution pattern in the first half indicate the display pattern of the main change performance image displayed on the main performance display unit 200a until the reach development performance starts, among the change performances of the pseudo continuous reach change pattern, that is, the execution pattern of the pattern display performance in which the performance patterns 210a, 210b, and 210c are displayed changeably. For example, "pseudo 2a" indicates that the pseudo continuous reach change pattern of "pseudo 2" in which the change display number of the performance patterns 210a, 210b, and 210c is two, and the main change performance image is display pattern a. Also, "pseudo 3b" indicates that the pseudo continuous reach change pattern of "pseudo 3" in which the change display number of the performance patterns 210a, 210b, and 210c is three, and the main change performance image is display pattern b.

In the first half variation presentation decision table and second half variation presentation decision table shown in FIG. 61, the selection ratio is set so that the variation presentation of the no-reach variation pattern and the normal reach variation pattern is executed only when the result of the big role lottery is a miss. Also, the developed reach variation pattern and the pseudo-continuous reach variation pattern are determined both when there is a miss and when there is a jackpot, but the selection ratio of the developed reach variation pattern is set higher when there is a miss and lower when there is a jackpot than the pseudo-continuous reach variation pattern. In this way, by setting the selection ratio when there is a miss and when there is a jackpot, the pseudo-continuous reach variation pattern is set to have a higher reliability than the developed reach variation pattern.

Furthermore, within the pseudo-sequential reach fluctuation pattern, the more the number of pseudos, the higher the selection rate for a big win and the lower the selection rate for a miss, so that the more the number of pseudos, the higher the reliability.

As described above, the general flow of the variable performance is determined by the variable performance determination table, but at the start of the variable performance, the possibility of executing various element performances that make up the variable performance and the execution pattern are further determined based on the variable mode command or the variable pattern command. Here, element performance refers to all performances that make up the variable performance, such as the variable display of performance patterns 210a, 210b, and 210c on the main performance display unit 200a, the development image displayed on the main performance display unit 200a in the reach development performance, and even the performance that moves the performance role device 202, as described above. In the embodiment, preview performances (suggested performances) are executed at various times during the variable performance as element performances that make up the variable performance.

This preview performance is a performance in which a predetermined image is displayed on the main performance display unit 200a and the performance role device 202 is moved at a predetermined timing when the fluctuation performance starts, when the fluctuation patterns 210a, 210b, 210c are displayed again in the fluctuation performance of the pseudo continuous reach fluctuation pattern, and even during the reach development performance, and the possibility of execution and the execution pattern are determined for each preview performance. Each preview performance has multiple types of execution patterns, and for each of the multiple types of execution patterns, a selection ratio is set for each fluctuation pattern command or fluctuation mode command, in other words, for each possibility of winning the jackpot, and an expected value is set for each execution pattern based on this selection ratio.

As explained above, when the sub-control board 330 receives a variation command, it determines the execution pattern of the variation performance, whether each element performance can be executed, and the execution pattern, and the variation performance is executed while the special pattern is being displayed. In this way, the variation performance is executed once for each special pattern variable display, but in the embodiment, a performance spanning multiple special pattern variable displays is also executed.

Figure 62 is a diagram for explaining an example of a reserved display effect according to the reference example. A reserved display area 211 is provided at the bottom of the main effect display section 200a. Although not shown in Figures 55 to 60, the reserved display area 211 is always displayed on the main effect display section 200a even during variable effects and while waiting for a game. During variable effects, a reserved display effect is performed in this reserved display area 211. In the reserved display effect, the reserved display 212a indicating the reserved item read out to the processing area (0th memory section) during the big role lottery, the first reserved display 212b, the second reserved display 212c, the third reserved display 212d, and the fourth reserved display 212e indicating the reserved items stored in the first memory section to the fourth memory section of the first special chart reserved memory area, respectively, are displayed in the reserved display area 211. In the following, the reserved display 212a and the first reserved display 212b to the fourth reserved display 212e are collectively referred to as reserved display 212.

For example, when the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner and four special 1 reserved symbols are stored in the main RAM 300c, the reserved symbol 212a and the first reserved symbol 212b to the fourth reserved symbol 212e, a total of five reserved symbols 212, are displayed in the reserved symbol display area 211 as shown in FIG. 62(a). Then, when the display of the special symbol is terminated from this state, the special 1 reserved symbol stored in the first memory unit is read into the processing area (the 0th memory unit) and a large role lottery is performed, and the reserved symbol shift processing of the main RAM 300c is executed, the reserved symbol 212a is erased and the first reserved symbol 212b to the fourth reserved symbol 212e are moved one position to the left as shown in FIG. 62(b). Furthermore, when the next special 1 reserved symbol is read from this state, each reserved symbol 212 is further moved as shown in FIG. 62(c). In this way, the reserved symbol display is a display that notifies the player of the number of special 1 reserved symbols stored in the main RAM 300c.

In addition, multiple display patterns of the reserved display 212 are provided, and the display color is different for each display pattern. In the main control board 300, when a reserved is stored, the acquisition time performance determination process (step S536) is executed, and a look-ahead designation command indicating the variable information to be determined when the newly stored reserved is read out to the 0th storage unit is sent to the sub-control board 330. When the look-ahead designation command is received, the sub-control board 330 determines the display pattern of the reserved display corresponding to the newly stored reserved based on the received command. At this time, the selection ratio of each display pattern is set for each look-ahead designation command, that is, for each variable information to be determined when the newly stored reserved is read out in the big role lottery. In other words, since the selection ratio of each display pattern is set according to the possibility of winning a jackpot and the execution pattern of the variable performance, the display pattern of the reserved display 212 suggests the reliability (expected value) of the jackpot.

Figure 63 (a) is a diagram explaining the final hold display pattern determination table, and Figure 63 (b) is a diagram explaining the previous hold display pattern determination table. As described above, in the acquisition time performance determination process in the main control board 300, a look-ahead designation command indicating the variation mode number and variation pattern number to be determined when the newly stored hold is read out is sent to the sub-control board 330. In other words, the look-ahead designation command is a command that transmits the variation mode number and variation pattern number to be determined when the hold is read out to the sub-control board 330. According to the final hold display pattern determination table, the selection ratio of the display pattern of the hold display 212 is set for each look-ahead designation command (variation pattern number), and when a look-ahead designation command is received, the final display pattern of the hold display 212, i.e., the final display pattern of the hold display 212a, is determined.

According to the final hold display pattern determination table shown in FIG. 63(a), one of eight display patterns is determined: "default (white)", "flashing", "blue", "yellow", "green", "black", "red", and "premium (rainbow)". Then, once the final display pattern of the hold display 212a is determined, the display pattern of the hold display 212 displayed before that is determined by referring to the previous hold display pattern determination table shown in FIG. 63(b). According to this previous hold display pattern determination table, a selection ratio of the display pattern of the hold display 212 to be displayed before the moving display is set for each display pattern of the hold display 212.

For example, when a hold is stored in the second memory section of the first special chart hold memory area in the main control board 300, the final display pattern of the hold display 212a is determined by referring to the final hold display pattern determination table. In this case, the display pattern of the first hold display 212b is then determined by referring to the previous hold display pattern determination table. At this time, the display pattern of the first hold display 212b is determined based on the previously determined final display pattern of the hold display 212a. For example, if the final display pattern of the hold display 212a is "blue," then according to the previous hold display pattern determination table, the display pattern of the first hold display 212b is determined to be "blinking" with a probability of 200/250, and "blue" with a probability of 50/250.

Once the display pattern of the first hold display 212b is determined in this manner, the display pattern of the second hold display 212c is then determined based on the previously determined display pattern of the first hold display 212b, again by referring to the previous hold display pattern determination table.

As described above, when a hold is stored, first the final display pattern of the hold display 212a is determined, and then the display pattern of the first hold display 212b is determined based on the determined final display pattern of the hold display 212a, and so on, in a manner that works backwards in the display order to determine the display patterns. Note that, according to the previous hold display pattern determination table, the selection ratio is set so that only a display pattern that is the same as the previously determined hold display 212 display pattern or one with a low reliability is determined.

As described above, in the hold display presentation, multiple display patterns are provided for the hold display 212, each of which has a different expected value for the award of a predetermined gaming profit. From the time the hold display 212 is first displayed on the main presentation display section 200a until it is finally erased, the hold display 212 may be displayed in one display pattern, or the display pattern may change during the display period.

In the reference example, the timing when the display pattern of the hold display 212 changes can be broadly divided into when the newly stored special hold 1 (hereinafter also referred to as the target hold) is moved to the first hold display 212b to the third hold display 212d, and when the target change display related to the target hold is in progress.

Next, we will explain the processing in the sub-control board 330 to execute the above-mentioned variable performance. Note that, in the following, we will omit explanations of the processing in the sub-control board 330 that is not related to the variable performance.

(Sub-CPU Initialization Processing of the Sub-Control Board 330)
FIG. 64 is a flowchart explaining the sub-CPU initialization process (S1000) of the sub-control board 330 relating to the reference example of performance.

(Step S1000-1)
When the power is turned on, the sub-CPU 330a reads a CPU initialization processing program from the sub-ROM 330b, and initializes and sets flags and the like stored in the sub-RAM 330c.

(Step S1000-3)
Next, the sub-CPU 330a performs a process of updating each effect random number, and thereafter repeats the process of step S1000-3 until an interrupt process is performed. Note that multiple types of effect random numbers are provided, and here, each effect random number is updated asynchronously.

(Sub-timer interrupt processing of the sub-control board 330)
65 is a flow chart for explaining the sub timer interrupt process (S1100) of the sub control board 330 according to the reference example. The sub control board 330 is provided with a reset clock pulse generating circuit (not shown) that generates a clock pulse at a predetermined cycle (30 times per second). When the reset clock pulse generating circuit generates a clock pulse, the sub CPU 330a reads a timer interrupt process program and starts the sub timer interrupt process.

(Step S1100-1)
The sub CPU 330a saves the registers.

(Step S1100-3)
The sub-CPU 330a performs processing for permitting an interrupt.

(Step S1100-5)
The sub-CPU 330a performs update processing of various timer counters used in the sub-control board 330. Here, unless otherwise specified, the various timer counters are decremented by 1 each time the sub-timer interrupt processing of the sub-control board 330 is performed, and the decrement stops when the counter reaches 0.

(Step S1200)
The sub-CPU 330a analyzes the command stored in the receive buffer of the sub-RAM 330c, and performs various processes according to the received command. When a command is transmitted from the main control board 300, the sub-control board 330 performs a command reception interrupt process, and the command transmitted from the main control board 300 is stored in the receive buffer. Here, the command stored in the receive buffer is analyzed by the command reception interrupt process.

(Step S1100-7)
The sub-CPU 330a performs a time schedule management process that refers to a time table and executes a process corresponding to the corresponding time stored in the time table. Here, based on the time data set in the time table, various flags are turned on or off, or commands are sent to each performance device, thereby controlling the execution of each performance, including the variable performance and the major role performance.

(Step S1100-9)
The sub-CPU 330a restores the registers and ends the sub-timer interrupt process.

Figure 66 is a flowchart explaining the above command analysis process, which is a process for receiving a pre-reading command for a reference performance example that is executed when a pre-reading command is received. As described above, the pre-reading command is set in the main control board 300 in Figure 31, and then transmitted to the sub-control board 330 by the sub-command transmission process of step S100-65 (see Figure 21).

(Step S1210-1)
The sub-CPU 330a first analyzes the received read-ahead designation command.

(Step S1210-3)
The sub-CPU 330a stores the advance judgment information based on the analysis result of the above step S1210-1. The sub-RAM 330c of the sub-control board 330 is provided with a first advance judgment information storage unit corresponding to the first special chart reserved storage area of the main control board 300, and a second advance judgment information storage unit corresponding to the second special chart reserved storage area. The first advance judgment information storage unit has four storage units, the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit. The first storage unit to the fourth storage unit of the first advance judgment information storage unit correspond to the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit of the first special chart reserved storage area, respectively. Similarly, the second advance judgment information storage unit has four storage units, the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit, and the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit of the second advance judgment information storage unit correspond to the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit of the second special chart reserved storage area, respectively. Here, the pre-determination information is stored in the memory section among the first to fourth memory sections of the first special chart reservation memory area or the second special chart reservation memory area of the main control board 300, which corresponds to the memory section in which the newly reserved data is stored.

(Step S1210-5)
The sub-CPU 330a performs a final hold display pattern determination process to determine the final display pattern of the hold display 212. Here, based on the received look-ahead designation command, the final hold display pattern determination table (FIG. 63(a)) is referenced, and the final display pattern of the hold display 212a is determined and stored.

(Step S1210-7)
The sub-CPU 330a derives the number of times to determine the display pattern of the reserved display 212, i.e., the change timing of the reserved display 212, based on the storage unit in which the reserved is stored, and determines the display pattern of the reserved display 212 by referring to the previous reserved display pattern determination table (FIG. 63(b)) for the derived number of times. Then, the display pattern information of the reserved display 212 thus determined is stored in a predetermined storage unit, and the process proceeds to step S1210-9.

(Step S1210-9)
Based on the determinations in steps S1210-5 and S1210-7, the sub-CPU 330a performs a hold display start process to start displaying the hold display 212, and ends the read-ahead designation command reception process. As a result, when the hold is stored, the display of the corresponding hold display 212 is started.

Figure 67 is a flowchart explaining the change command receiving process executed when a change command is received, which is part of the command analysis process for the reference performance example. As described above, the change command is set in the main control board 300 in steps S612-13 and S612-17 in Figure 37, and then transmitted to the sub-control board 330 by the sub-command transmission process in step S100-65 (see Figure 21).

(Step S1220-1)
When a variation command is received, the sub-CPU 330a first analyzes and stores the received variation pattern command.

(Step S1220-3)
The sub-CPU 330a acquires the performance random number (0 to 249) updated in the above step S1000-3, and determines and stores the execution pattern of the variable performance in the latter half based on the acquired performance random number and the analysis result in the above step S1220-1.

(Step S1220-5)
The sub-CPU 330a analyzes and stores the received variation mode command.

(Step S1220-7)
The sub-CPU 330a acquires the performance random number (0 to 249) updated in the above step S1000-3, and determines and stores the execution pattern of the variable performance for the first half based on the acquired performance random number and the analysis result in the above step S1220-5.

(Step S1220-9)
The sub-CPU 330a obtains the performance random number (0 to 249) updated in step S1000-3 for each preview performance, and based on the obtained performance random number and the analysis results in steps S1220-1 and S1220-5, refers to each preview performance decision table to determine whether or not to execute each preview performance and the execution pattern, and stores the same.

(Step S1220-11)
The sub-CPU 330a executes a shift process to shift the pre-determination information stored in the pre-determination information storage unit. Here, when starting a variable performance based on the special 1 reservation, the pre-determination information stored in the fourth storage unit to the second storage unit of the first pre-determination information storage unit is shifted to the third storage unit to the first storage unit of the first pre-determination information storage unit, respectively, and when starting a variable performance based on the special 2 reservation, the pre-determination information stored in the fourth storage unit to the second storage unit of the second pre-determination information storage unit is shifted to the third storage unit to the first storage unit of the second pre-determination information storage unit, respectively.

(Step S1220-13)
The sub-CPU 330a performs a reservation display shift process to move and display the reservation display 212. In addition, here, when the display pattern of the reservation display 212 is to be changed, execution data for changing the display pattern at a predetermined timing is set.

(Step S1220-15)
The sub-CPU 330a sets the time data of the time table based on the determination of each step above, and ends the variable command receiving process. Based on the time table set here, in the above step S1100-7, the process of displaying the image for the variable performance on the main performance display unit 200a, the sound output process, the lighting control process of the performance lighting device 204, and other performance execution control are performed.

<Example>
Next, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to the above-mentioned reference example will be described. In the following, modifications to the above-mentioned reference example will be described in the embodiment. In the following description of the embodiment, the same components as those in the above-mentioned reference example will be given the same reference symbols, and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted. Therefore, the parts of the above-mentioned reference example that are not described below as modifications are naturally included in this embodiment.

In this embodiment, as in the above reference example, the display of changing patterns on the second special pattern display 162 is given priority over the display of changing patterns on the first special pattern display 160. However, in the above reference example, a maximum of four special 1 reserves and four special 2 reserves can be stored, whereas in this embodiment, a maximum of four special 1 reserves can be stored, while the maximum number of special 2 reserves that can be stored is zero.

That is, in the embodiment, the special 2 reservation is not stored. Therefore, if a game ball enters the second start hole 122 while the first special pattern display 160 or the second special pattern display 162 is displaying a changing pattern, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out, but the special 2 reservation is not acquired. In other words, even if a game ball enters the second start hole 122 while the first special pattern display 160 or the second special pattern display 162 is displaying a changing pattern, the player cannot acquire the right to a big role lottery based on the special 2 reservation. In order to execute a big role lottery based on the special 2 reservation, the player needs to enter a game ball into the second start hole 122 in a state where the changing pattern display is not being executed in either the first special pattern display 160 or the second special pattern display 162, and the big role game and the small win game are not being executed, that is, in a state where the changing pattern display can be started immediately.

In addition, in this embodiment, five types of game states are provided: a non-time-saving game state, a minute time-saving game state, an A-time saving game state, a B-time saving game state, and a C-time saving game state. Each of these five game states has game progress conditions that are at least partially different from each other, and the game progresses according to the progress conditions that correspond to the game state being set.

As will be described in more detail later, in this embodiment, as in the above reference example, a normal game is played based on the entry of a game ball into the gate 124. In the normal game, a normal symbol lottery is played, and if a winning symbol is selected in the normal symbol lottery, an auxiliary game is played in which the second start hole 122 is controlled to open and close. Here, two patterns are provided for the opening and closing of the second start hole 122 in the auxiliary game.

Specifically, there are provided an opening/closing mode in which the opening/closing time of the second starting port 122 is short and the game ball cannot enter the second starting port 122, and an opening/closing mode (specific mode) in which the opening/closing time of the second starting port 122 is long and the game ball can enter the second starting port 122. In the following, the opening/closing mode of the second starting port 122 that allows the game ball to enter, or the auxiliary game in which the second starting port 122 is controlled to open and close in a mode in which the game ball can enter, is referred to as a long opening. In contrast, the opening/closing mode of the second starting port 122 that does not allow the game ball to enter, or the auxiliary game in which the second starting port 122 is controlled to open and close in a mode in which the game ball cannot enter, is referred to as a short opening.

The above five types of game states have different opening and closing conditions for the second start port 122. The non-time-saving game state and the minute-time-saving game state are game states in which the second start port 122 will not be long-opened, while the A-time-saving game state, the B-time-saving game state, and the C-time-saving game state are game states in which the second start port 122 may be long-opened. The non-time-saving game state and the minute-time-saving game state share the same probability of the second start port 122 being long-opened and the opening and closing mode of the second start port 122 in the auxiliary game, making it virtually impossible for the player to distinguish between the two game states from the progress of the game.

In addition, the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, and the C time-saving game state have different probabilities of the second starting hole 122 being long-opened, and the degree of advantage differs depending on the difference in the long-opening probability. In the following, the non-time-saving game state and the slight time-saving game state are collectively referred to as the normal state, and the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, and the C time-saving game state are collectively referred to as the advantageous state.

In addition, in this embodiment, there are two types of misses: normal misses and specific misses. Since normal misses and specific misses are both misses, the big prize slot will not be opened, as in small win games and big role games. However, if a specific miss is won, there is a possibility that the game state at the time of winning will transition to another game state.

Figure 68 is a diagram explaining the special 1 jackpot determination random number judgment table according to the embodiment. The special 1 jackpot determination random number judgment table according to the embodiment is used in place of the special 1 jackpot determination random number judgment table according to the reference example above. According to the special 1 jackpot determination random number judgment table according to the embodiment, when the setting value is set to 1 (registered setting value = 1), the big prize lottery is performed by referring to the special 1 jackpot determination random number judgment table a shown in Figure 68 (a).

According to this special 1 jackpot determination random number judgment table a, if the jackpot determination random number is between 10001 and 10298, it is judged to be a jackpot, if the jackpot determination random number is between 30001 and 36553, it is judged to be a specific miss, and if it is any other jackpot determination random number, it is judged to be a normal miss. Therefore, in this case, the probability of a jackpot is approximately 1/219.9, and the probability of a specific miss is approximately 1/10.

In addition, when the setting value is set to 2 to 6 (registered setting value = 2 to 6), the big prize lottery is performed by referring to the special 1 jackpot determination random number judgment tables b to f, as shown in Figures 68 (b) to (f), respectively. According to these special 1 jackpot determination random number judgment tables b to f, the jackpot determination random number that is judged as a jackpot is set as shown, and the higher the registered setting value, the higher the probability of winning the jackpot.

In the embodiment, a small prize cannot be won by a lottery for a major prize based on a special 1 reservation, but a small prize can be won by a lottery for a major prize based on a special 1 reservation. Also, here, the probability of winning a specific miss is the same for all registered setting values, but the probability of winning a specific miss may differ depending on the registered setting value. When the probability of winning a specific miss is made different depending on the registered setting value, it is preferable that the higher the registered setting value, the higher the probability of winning a specific miss. However, it may also be set so that the higher the registered setting value, the lower the probability of winning a specific miss.

Figure 69 is a diagram for explaining the special 2 jackpot determination random number judgment table according to the embodiment. The special 2 jackpot determination random number judgment table according to the embodiment is used in place of the special 2 jackpot determination random number judgment table according to the above reference example. According to the special 2 jackpot determination random number judgment table according to the embodiment, when the setting value is set to 1 (registered setting value = 1), the special 2 jackpot determination random number judgment table a shown in Figure 69 (a) is referenced to perform a big role lottery. According to the special 2 jackpot determination random number judgment table a, if the jackpot determination random number is 10001 to 10298, it is judged as a jackpot, and if it is any other jackpot determination random number, it is judged as a small jackpot. Therefore, in this case, the probability of a jackpot is approximately 1/219.9, and the probability of a small jackpot is approximately 1/1.

When the setting value is set to 2 to 6 (registered setting value = 2 to 6), the big prize lottery is performed by referring to the special 2 jackpot determination random number judgment tables b to f, as shown in Fig. 69 (b) to (f), respectively. According to the special 2 jackpot determination random number judgment table of the embodiment, as is clear from a comparison of Fig. 68 and Fig. 69, if the registered setting value is the same, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same for the special 1 jackpot determination random number judgment table and the special 2 jackpot determination random number judgment table.

Note that here, the lottery for the big prize based on the special 2 reservation will not result in a specific miss or a normal miss. However, it may be possible to win a specific miss or a normal miss even through the lottery for the big prize based on the special 2 reservation.

Figure 70 is a diagram for explaining the winning symbol random number determination table according to the embodiment. The winning symbol random number determination table according to the embodiment is used in place of the winning symbol random number determination table according to the above reference example. When a "jackpot" is won by special 1 reservation, as shown in Figure 70 (a), winning symbol random number determination table a for special 1 is selected. When a jackpot is won based on special 1 reservation, special symbols A and B are determined as the jackpot symbols.

Specifically, according to the special 1 winning pattern random number determination table a, if the winning pattern random number is 0, the special pattern A, which is the jackpot pattern, is determined, and if the winning pattern random number is between 1 and 99, the special pattern B, which is the jackpot pattern, is determined. Therefore, if you win a jackpot based on the special 1 reservation, the probability that special pattern A will be determined is 1%, and the probability that special pattern B will be determined is 99%.

In addition, if a "specific miss" is won by the special 1 reservation, the special 1 winning symbol random number determination table b is selected as shown in FIG. 70(b). If a specific miss is won based on the special 1 reservation, the special symbols Xa and Xb are determined as the special symbols.

Specifically, according to the special 1 winning symbol random number determination table b, if the winning symbol random number is between 0 and 15, the special symbol Xa is determined, and if the winning symbol random number is between 16 and 99, the special symbol Xb is determined. Therefore, if a specific losing ticket is won based on the special 1 reservation, the probability that the special symbol Xa will be determined is 16%, and the probability that the special symbol Xb will be determined is 84%. In the following, the special symbols determined when a specific losing ticket is won, i.e., the special symbols Xa and Xb, are referred to as the specific losing symbols.

In addition, if a "big win" is won by the special 2 reservation, the special 2 winning pattern random number determination table a is selected as shown in FIG. 70(c), and if a "small win" is won by the special 2 reservation, the special 2 winning pattern random number determination table b is selected as shown in FIG. 70(d).

As shown in FIG. 70(c), when a jackpot is won based on the special 2 reserved number, the special patterns C and D are determined as the jackpot pattern. Specifically, according to the special 2 winning pattern random number determination table a, if the winning pattern random number is between 0 and 24, the special pattern C, which is the jackpot pattern, is determined, and if the winning pattern random number is between 25 and 99, the special pattern D, which is the jackpot pattern, is determined. Therefore, when a jackpot is won based on the special 2 reserved number, the probability that the special pattern C will be determined is 25%, and the probability that the special pattern D will be determined is 75%.

Also, as shown in FIG. 70(d), if a small win is won based on the special 2 reserved number, special patterns a and b are determined as the small win pattern. Specifically, according to the special 2 winning pattern random number determination table b, if the winning pattern random number is 0-24, special pattern a, which is the small win pattern, is determined, and if the winning pattern random number is 25-99, special pattern b, which is the small win pattern, is determined. Therefore, if a small win is won based on the special 2 reserved number, the probability that special pattern a will be determined is 25%, and the probability that special pattern b will be determined is 75%.

Note that here, the selection ratio of the big win symbol and the small win symbol is the same for all setting values, but the selection ratio of one or more of the big win symbol and the small win symbol may be different for each setting value. Also, the types and numbers of special symbols shown in FIG. 70 are merely examples, and can be modified as appropriate.

Figure 71 is a diagram explaining the first special electric role activation ram set table according to the embodiment, and Figure 72 is a diagram explaining the second special electric role activation ram set table according to the embodiment. The first special electric role activation ram set table and the second special electric role activation ram set table according to the embodiment are used in place of the first special electric role activation ram set table and the second special electric role activation ram set table according to the above reference example.

When the special patterns A, B, C, and D, which are the big win patterns, are determined, an opening/closing process is executed to control the opening/closing of the first big win opening 126 in a predetermined opening/closing pattern, with reference to the first special electric role activation ram set table, as shown in FIG. 71. Also, when the special patterns a and b, which are the small win patterns, are determined, an opening/closing process is executed to control the opening/closing of the first big win opening 126 and the second big win opening 128 in a predetermined opening/closing pattern, with reference to the second special electric role activation ram set table, as shown in FIG. 72. The big win game is composed of multiple rounds of play in which the first big win opening 126 is opened and closed a predetermined number of times, and the small win game is played only once in which the second big win opening 128 is opened and closed a predetermined number of times.

In this embodiment, when the special symbols A, B, and C, which are the jackpot symbols, are determined, a big prize game consisting of three rounds of play is executed, and when the special symbol D is determined, a big prize game consisting of ten rounds of play is executed. Each round of play ends when a specified number (10) of game balls enter the first big prize opening 126 or when a specified time (29.0 seconds) has elapsed since the first big prize opening 126 was opened.

When a game ball enters the big prize slot, 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls for each ball that enters. Since the specified number of balls in one round of play is 10, and the number of prize balls for each ball that enters is 15, a player can win 150 prize balls in one round of play. Therefore, if special patterns A, B, or C are selected, a player can win 450 prize balls in one big prize game, and if special pattern D is selected, a player can win 1,500 prize balls in one big prize game.

As shown in FIG. 72, when the special symbols a and b, which are the small win symbols, are determined, a small win game consisting of one round of play is first executed. In this small win game, the second large win opening 128 is opened and closed. In this case, in the small win game, the second large win opening 128 is opened for 0.1 seconds and closed for 3.0 seconds ten times.

Here, a specific area 140b and a non-specific area 140c are provided inside the second large prize opening 128, and a game ball that enters the second large prize opening 128 always enters either the specific area 140b or the non-specific area 140c. If a game ball that enters the second large prize opening 128 enters the specific area 140b during a small prize game, a type 2 big prize is won, and following the small prize game, a big prize game is played in which the first large prize opening 126 is opened.

At this time, if special symbol a is determined, two rounds (2R to 3R) of play in which the first large prize opening 126 is opened 29.0 seconds x 1 are played, and if special symbol b is determined, nine rounds (2R to 10R) of play in which the first large prize opening 126 is opened 29.0 seconds x 1 are played. In the following, the series of games from the small prize game to the big prize game that is played when special symbol a is determined is called 3R big prize game, and the series of games from the small prize game to the big prize game that is played when special symbol b is determined is called 10R big prize game.

Although a detailed explanation is omitted, the movable piece 128b that opens and closes the second large winning opening 128 is formed in a corrugated shape, and a game ball that falls onto the movable piece 128b rolls on the movable piece 128b for about a few seconds. Therefore, if game balls are continuously shot toward the second game area 116b during a small win game, the game ball will reliably enter the second large winning opening 128.

In addition, in the embodiment, for example, the movable member 142 is controlled so that all game balls that enter the second large winning port 128 enter the specific area 140b. Therefore, in the embodiment, as long as the player is playing appropriately, it is always possible for game balls to enter the specific area 140b during a small winning game.

Figure 73(a) is a diagram explaining game status setting table 1 according to the embodiment, and Figure 73(b) is a diagram explaining game status setting table 2 according to the embodiment. The game status setting table according to the embodiment is used in place of the game status setting table according to the above reference example. In the embodiment, when a jackpot is won in a big prize lottery, and when a two-type jackpot is won in a small prize game, the game status is set according to the type of special symbol that was won.

Specifically, when a so-called Type 1 jackpot is won, if the type of the determined jackpot symbol is special symbol A, the game state after the big win is set to time-saving game state C. Similarly, if the type of the determined jackpot symbol is special symbol B, C, or D, the game state after the big win is set to time-saving game state A, time-saving game state B, or time-saving game state C, respectively.

In addition, if the game ball enters the specific area 140b during the small win game after winning a small win in the big win lottery, i.e., if a double big win is won, if the determined small win pattern is special pattern a, the game state after the big win game is set to the B time-saving game state, and if the determined small win pattern is special pattern b, the game state after the big win game is set to the C time-saving game state.

In the embodiment, the number of special 2 time-saving times, the total number of time-saving times, and the number of regular pattern changes are set as time-saving end conditions for ending the time-saving game state. The number of special 2 time-saving times is the number of pattern change processes based on the special 2 reservation (hereinafter referred to as special 2 changes). The total number of time-saving times is the sum of the number of pattern change processes based on the special 1 reservation (hereinafter referred to as special 1 changes) and the number of special 2 changes. The number of regular pattern changes is the number of pattern change processes based on the regular pattern reservation (hereinafter referred to as regular pattern changes), i.e., the number of regular games. When any one of these three time-saving end conditions is met, the time-saving game state ends and the game state transitions to a non-time-saving game state.

Here, regardless of the type of special symbol, the number of times the special 2 time-saving is performed is set to 1, and the total number of times the time-saving is performed is set to 10. On the other hand, the number of times the normal symbol changes is set based on the type of special symbol that has been determined, as shown in FIG. 73(a). Here, if the game state after the big role is played is set to time-saving game state A, the number of times the normal symbol changes is set to 70 times, if the game state after the big role is played is set to time-saving game state B, the number of times the normal symbol changes is set to 50 times, and if the game state after the big role is played is set to time-saving game state C, the number of times the normal symbol changes is set to 100 times.

Therefore, for example, in the C time-saving game state, if a single special 2 variation does not result in a Type 1 or Type 2 jackpot, the game state transitions from the C time-saving game state to a non-time-saving game state. Also, in the embodiment, at the start of the 100th regular pattern variation in the C time-saving game state, the game state transitions to a non-time-saving game state regardless of the result of the regular pattern lottery. Note that in an advantageous state, at the end of the final regular pattern variation among the number of regular pattern variations specified for each type of special pattern, the game state may transition to a non-time-saving game state.

In addition, here, if the game state set after playing a big role is the same, the number of times the regular pattern changes is set is also the same. In other words, it can be said that the number of times the regular pattern changes is specified for each game state set after playing a big role. However, even if the game state set after playing a big role is the same, if the type of special pattern determined is different, a different number of times the regular pattern changes may be set. For example, when special pattern A is determined and when special pattern D is determined, both are set to the C time-saving game state, but the number of times the regular pattern changes at this time may be different from each other.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 73(b), when a specific miss is won, the game state can be changed depending on the type of specific miss pattern that has been determined and the game state at the time of winning. Specifically, when a special pattern Xa, which is a specific miss pattern, is won, if the game state at the time of winning is a non-time-saving game state, the game state is set to the C-time-saving game state. In this case, the time-saving end condition that is set is the same as when a type 1 jackpot or type 2 jackpot is won and the game state is set to the C-time-saving game state.

In addition, if the special symbol Xb, which is a specific losing symbol, is won, if the game state at the time of winning is a non-time-saving game state, the game state will be set to a micro-time-saving game state. Note that there is no time-saving end condition set for the micro-time-saving game state. Therefore, if the game state is set to the micro-time-saving game state, the micro-time-saving game state will basically continue until a type 1 jackpot or type 2 jackpot is won.

However, in this embodiment, a so-called ceiling function is provided. The ceiling function is a function that transitions the gaming state from the normal state to the advantageous state when the number of big role draws (variation number of times) after a big role play, or the number of times the patterns are displayed (variation display number, stop display number) on the first special symbol display 160 and the second special symbol display 162 reaches a preset ceiling number of times. Here, the ceiling number of times is set to 656 times, and if neither a type 1 jackpot nor a type 2 jackpot is won in the 656 big role draws after a big role play, the gaming state is set to the C time-saving gaming state.

The number of fluctuations used to manage whether or not the ceiling function is activated is counted continuously across all game states. In other words, even if the game state is changed, the number of fluctuations is not reset.

Since there is no condition for ending the time-saving mode, the time-saving mode will not end unless the number of times the game fluctuates reaches the ceiling number of times or unless a Type 1 or Type 2 jackpot is won.

Note that if the game state when the special symbols Xa and Xb are won is a game state other than the non-time-saving game state, the game state will not change. Therefore, the game state will only change when a specific miss is won during a non-time-saving game state.

Figure 74 is a diagram explaining a hit determination random number judgment table according to an embodiment. The hit determination random number judgment table according to an embodiment is used in place of the hit determination random number judgment table according to the above reference example. In the embodiment, when the game ball passes through the gate 124, one hit determination random number is obtained from the range of 0 to 65535, and this random number value is stored in the general game reserve memory area of the main RAM 300c, with a maximum of four.

Here, in the embodiment, three normal patterns, A, B, and C, are provided. All three of these normal patterns are winning patterns. Therefore, in the embodiment, when a normal pattern lottery is performed, the second starting hole 122 is always opened. In the embodiment, the winning random number determination table shown in FIG. 74 is referenced regardless of the game state. In other words, in the embodiment, the winning probability of each normal pattern is common to all game states. According to the winning random number determination table, when the winning random number is 10001 to 10298, the normal pattern A is determined as the type of normal pattern, when the winning random number is 10299 to 10656, the normal pattern B is determined as the type of normal pattern, and when the winning random number is any other winning random number, the normal pattern C is determined as the type of normal pattern. Therefore, the probability that the normal patterns A and B are determined is approximately 1/219.9 and approximately 1/183.0, respectively.

Figure 75 (a) is a diagram explaining a normal pattern change time data table according to the embodiment, and Figure 75 (b) is a diagram explaining an opening/closing control pattern table according to the embodiment. The normal pattern change time data table and the opening/closing control pattern table according to the embodiment are used in place of the normal pattern change time data table and the opening/closing control pattern table according to the above reference example. According to the normal pattern change time data table according to the embodiment, when the game state is set to a non-time-saving game state, the change time is determined to be 60 seconds, when the game state is set to a minute time-saving game state, the change time is determined to be 59 seconds, and when the game state is set to an A time-saving game state, a B time-saving game state, or a C time-saving game state, the change time is determined to be one of 1 second to 1 minute.

When the winning symbol is determined by the normal symbol lottery and the determined winning symbol is displayed on the normal symbol display 168, the movable piece 122b of the second starting hole 122 is controlled to energize by referring to the opening/closing control pattern table, as shown in FIG. 75(b). Note that, in reality, an opening/closing control pattern table is provided for each combination of the game state and the type of winning symbol, and the table corresponding to the combination of the current game state and the determined winning symbol is set when the normal electric role solenoid 122c starts to energize.

According to the opening/closing control pattern table, the time before normal power is released (waiting time until the second start port 122 starts to open), the maximum number of times the normal electric role is switched to open or closed (the number of times the second start port 122 is opened), the solenoid energization time (the energization time of the normal electric role solenoid 122c for each number of times the second start port 122 is opened, i.e., the opening time of the second start port 122 once), the specified number (the maximum number of winnings that can be won in the second start port 122 while the second start port 122 is fully open), the normal power closing effective time (the closing time between each opening of the second start port 122, i.e., the pause time), the normal power effective state time (waiting time from the end of the last opening of the second start port 122), and the normal power end wait time (waiting time until the display of the variable normal symbols is resumed after the normal power effective state time has elapsed) are stored in advance as control data for the second start port 122, as shown in the figure, for each combination of the game state and the type of winning symbol.

Specifically, when a winning symbol is determined in a non-time-saving play state or a micro-time-saving play state, the second start hole 122 is opened only once for 0.05 seconds, regardless of the type of winning symbol. Although a detailed explanation is omitted, in the embodiment, the second start hole 122 is configured so that a game ball will not enter the second start hole 122 when it is opened once for 0.05 seconds. Therefore, in a non-time-saving play state, a game ball will not enter the second start hole 122.

In addition, in the time-saving play state A, the time-saving play state B, and the time-saving play state C, the opening and closing pattern of the second start port 122 differs depending on the type of winning symbol that is determined. Specifically, in the time-saving play state A, if normal symbols A and B are won, the second start port 122 is opened 2.9 seconds x 2 times, and if normal symbol C is won, the second start port 122 is opened only 0.05 seconds x 1 time. When the second start port 122 is opened 2.9 seconds x 2 times, this is the long opening of the second start port 122 described above, and when the second start port 122 is opened only 0.05 seconds x 1 time, this is the short opening of the second start port 122 described above.

When a regular drawing is conducted, the probability of winning regular pattern A is approximately 1/219.9, and the probability of winning regular pattern B is approximately 1/183.0. Therefore, the probability of the long opening of the second start hole 122 in the A time-saving play state is approximately 1/99.9.

Although a detailed explanation is omitted, in the embodiment, the game ball is always configured to enter the second start hole 122 by opening twice for 2.9 seconds, so long as the player properly launches the game ball into the second game area 116b. Therefore, when normal patterns A and B are determined in the A time-saving game state, the game ball will definitely enter the second start hole 122 as long as the player is playing properly. In other words, the probability of winning a double jackpot in the A time-saving game state is approximately 1 in 99.9.

In addition, in the B time-saving play state, if normal pattern A is won, the second start hole 122 is opened twice for 2.9 seconds, and if normal pattern B or C is won, the second start hole 122 is opened only once for 0.05 seconds. Therefore, the probability of a long opening in the B time-saving play state is approximately 1 in 219.9.

In addition, in the C time-saving play state, regardless of the type of normal symbol that is won, the second start hole 122 opens twice for 2.9 seconds. Therefore, the probability of a long opening in the C time-saving play state is 1/1.

When a winning symbol is determined, a time before normal power is released is set before the second start port 122 is opened. This time before normal power is released is the time during which the second start port 122 is maintained in a closed state, and corresponds to the so-called opening time. When the second start port 122 is short-opened, the time before normal power is released is set to 1.0 seconds. On the other hand, when the second start port 122 is long-opened, the time before normal power is released is set to 3.0 seconds.

In this way, the opening and closing conditions for opening and closing the second start opening 122 are associated as game progress conditions with each game state for each type of normal symbol. The opening and closing conditions for the second start opening 122 stipulate three elements: the probability of winning the normal symbol, the time for which the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and the opening conditions for the second start opening 122, but the opening and closing conditions in the embodiment are merely an example. The opening and closing conditions for the second start opening 122 can be appropriately modified in design within the scope that allows the gameplay of the gaming machine 100 described below to be realized.

Figure 76 is a diagram explaining the game flow of the gaming machine 100 according to the embodiment. Note that Figure 76 mainly shows the game flow when the player is playing appropriately in accordance with the game characteristics, and does not show cases where irregular situations occur. Here, Figure 76 will be used to explain the game flow when the game is being played appropriately.

The initial state of the gaming machine 100 is the non-time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. 76(a). In the non-time-saving gaming state, even if a winning symbol is drawn in the normal lottery, the second starting hole 122 will not be opened long. Therefore, in the non-time-saving gaming state, the player must perform a left shot to launch the gaming ball toward the first gaming area 116a in order to cause the gaming ball to enter the first starting hole 120. In other words, the non-time-saving gaming state can be said to be a gaming state in which the game progresses by causing the gaming ball to enter the first starting hole 120.

When a game ball enters the first starting hole 120, a special 1 reservation is acquired, and a special 1 variation is executed, including a lottery for a big prize based on the special 1 reservation, and a changing and stopping display of the patterns on the first special pattern display 160. The probability of winning a big prize in the special 1 variation is approximately 1 in 219.9, and the probability of winning a special miss is approximately 1 in 10.

When a specific miss occurs in a non-time-saving game state, either special pattern Xa or Xb is determined as the specific miss pattern. When a specific miss occurs, there is a 16% probability that special pattern Xa will be determined as the specific miss pattern, and an 84% probability that special pattern Xb will be determined. When special pattern Xa is determined in a non-time-saving game state, the game state transitions to time-saving game state C shown in (h) of Figure 76. As will be described in more detail later, time-saving game state C is the most advantageous game state for the player, and is a state in which the player can immediately obtain the right to play a big role game in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained.

In this way, in the non-time-saving play state, there is about a 1/10 chance of winning a specific miss, and if you win a specific miss, there is a 16% chance of transitioning to the most advantageous C time-saving play state.

On the other hand, when the special symbol Xb is determined in the non-time-saving game state, the game state transitions to the micro-time-saving game state shown in FIG. 76 (b). In the micro-time-saving game state, as in the non-time-saving game state, even if a winning symbol is selected in the regular lottery, the second start hole 122 will not be fully opened. Therefore, in the micro-time-saving game state, the player must hit the ball to the left in order to get the game ball to enter the first start hole 120. In other words, the micro-time-saving game state can be said to be a game state in which the game progresses by getting the game ball to enter the first start hole 120.

As mentioned above, the micro-time-saving game state does not have a time-saving end condition, so the micro-time-saving game state continues until a jackpot is won or the ceiling function is activated. When the number of fluctuations reaches the ceiling number in the micro-time-saving game state or non-time-saving game state and the ceiling function is activated, the game transitions to the C time-saving game state, which is the most advantageous for the player.

In addition, in the micro-time-saving game state, even if a specific miss is won, there is no transition to another game state. In other words, in the micro-time-saving game state, there is no difference between a specific miss and a normal miss. In contrast, in the non-time-saving game state, there is about a 1/10 chance of winning a specific miss, and of that, there is a 16% chance of transitioning to the C-time-saving game state, which is the most advantageous for the player. Therefore, the non-time-saving game state can be said to be a more advantageous state than the micro-time-saving game state, since there is a possibility of transitioning to the C-time-saving game state by winning a specific miss.

When a jackpot is won with a special 1 variation in a non-time-saving game state or a micro-time-saving game state, a 3R big win game is executed as shown in FIG. 76 (c). When a jackpot is won with a special 1 variation, either special pattern A or B is determined as the jackpot pattern. At this time, the probability that special pattern A will be determined is 1%, and the probability that special pattern B will be determined is 99%. If special pattern A is determined, the game state is set to the C time-saving game state after the 3R big win game, and if special pattern B is determined, the game state is set to the A time-saving game state shown in FIG. 76 (d) after the 3R big win game.

The probability of the second starting hole 122 opening long in the A time-saving game state is approximately 1/99.9. Therefore, in the A time-saving game state, the player needs to hit the right to make the game ball enter the gate 124. In other words, the A time-saving game state is a state in which the game progresses by making the game ball enter the gate 124 and executing a normal pattern lottery and a normal pattern change including a pattern change display and a stop display on the normal pattern display 168.

When the A time-saving play state is set, the number of normal pattern changes is set to 70 as a condition for ending the time-saving play state. In the A time-saving play state, if the long opening of the second start hole 122 is won and the game ball enters the second start hole 122, a special 2 reservation is acquired, and a special 2 change is executed, including a lottery for a major role based on the special 2 reservation, and the change and stop display of the patterns on the second special pattern display 162. In this special 2 change, a big win or a small win is always won.

If a jackpot is won with a special 2 variation, the special symbols C and D are determined as the jackpot symbols. At this time, the probability that special symbol C will be determined is 25%, and the probability that special symbol D will be determined is 75%. If a jackpot is won and special symbol C is determined as the jackpot symbol, a 3R big win game is executed as shown in (e) of Figure 76, and the game state after the 3R big win game is set to the B time-saving game state as shown in (f) of Figure 76.

On the other hand, if a jackpot is won and special pattern D is determined as the jackpot pattern, a 10R big prize game is executed as shown in FIG. 76(g), and the game state after the 10R big prize game is set to the C time-saving game state as shown in FIG. 76(h).

In addition, in the A time-saving game state, if a small win is won with a special 2 variation, the special symbols a and b are determined as the small win symbols. At this time, the probability that special symbol a will be determined is 25%, and the probability that special symbol b will be determined is 75%. If a small win is won and special symbol a is determined as the small win symbol, and the game ball enters specific area 140b during the small win game and a type 2 jackpot is won, a 3R big prize game is executed as shown in FIG. 76 (e), and the game state after the 3R big prize game is set to the B time-saving game state shown in FIG. 76 (f).

On the other hand, if a small win is won, special pattern b is determined as the small win pattern, and the game ball enters specific area 140b during the small win game, winning a type 2 big win, a 10R big win game is executed as shown in (g) of FIG. 76, and the game state after the 10R big win game is set to the C time-saving game state as shown in (h) of FIG. 76.

As described above, if the player is playing appropriately, he or she can reliably place the game ball into the second start hole 122 during the long opening. When the game ball enters the second start hole 122, a small win or a big win is always won, and a 3R big win game or a 10R big win game is executed. In other words, the A time-saving game state can be said to be a state in which the player aims to win the long opening of the second start hole 122 with a probability of approximately 1 in 99.9 within the range of 70 regular drawing.

When the A time-saving game state is set, the time-saving end condition is set to 1 for the special 2 time-saving count and 10 for the total time-saving count. Suppose that in the A time-saving game state, the second start port 122 is long-opened and a game ball enters the second start port 122 while it is long-opened. In this case, a special 2 variation is executed, and if a small jackpot is won in this special 2 variation, a small jackpot game is executed. However, if the game ball is not launched properly during the small jackpot game, the game ball will not enter the second large winning port 128 and will not enter the specific area 140b.

If a small win game is executed but the game ball does not enter the specific area 140b during the small win game, the time-saving end condition (special 2 fluctuation = 1 time) is met, a so-called puncture occurs, the A time-saving game state ends, and the game transitions to a non-time-saving game state. Also, for example, if special 1 fluctuation is executed 10 times in the A time-saving game state, the time-saving end condition (special 1 fluctuation + special 2 fluctuation = 10 times) is met, a puncture occurs, and the game transitions from the A time-saving game state to a non-time-saving game state. Furthermore, if the second starting hole 122 is not long-opened within the range of 70 normal fluctuations in the A time-saving game state, a so-called time-saving escape occurs, the A time-saving game state ends, and the game transitions to a non-time-saving game state.

In the B time-saving game state shown in (f) of FIG. 76, the probability of the second start hole 122 being opened long is set to approximately 1/219.9. Also, in the B time-saving game state, the number of normal map fluctuations is set to 50 as a time-saving end condition. Therefore, in the B time-saving game state, if the second start hole 122 is not opened long within the range of 50 normal map fluctuations, the time-saving end occurs and the game state transitions to a non-time-saving game state. Also, if any other time-saving end condition is met, a break occurs and the game state transitions from the B time-saving game state to a non-time-saving game state.

On the other hand, in the B time-saving game state, if the long opening of the second start hole 122 is won and the game ball enters the second start hole 122, a special 2 variation is executed. In this special 2 variation, a big win or a small win is always won.

If a jackpot is won with a special 2 variation, the special symbols C and D are determined as the jackpot symbols. At this time, the probability that special symbol C will be determined is 25%, and the probability that special symbol D will be determined is 75%. If a jackpot is won and special symbol C is determined as the jackpot symbol, a 3R big win game is executed as shown in (e) of Figure 76, and the game state after the 3R big win game is set again to the B time-saving game state.

On the other hand, if a jackpot is won and special pattern D is determined as the jackpot pattern, a 10R big prize game is executed as shown in FIG. 76(g), and the game state after the 10R big prize game is set to the C time-saving game state as shown in FIG. 76(h).

In addition, in the B time-saving game state, if a small win is won with a special 2 variation, the special symbols a and b are determined as the small win symbols. At this time, the probability that special symbol a will be determined is 25%, and the probability that special symbol b will be determined is 75%. If a small win is won and special symbol a is determined as the small win symbol, and the game ball enters specific area 140b during the small win game and a type 2 jackpot is won, a 3R big prize game is executed as shown in (e) of FIG. 76, and the game state after the 3R big prize game is set to the B time-saving game state shown in (f) of FIG. 76.

On the other hand, if a small win is won, special pattern b is determined as the small win pattern, and the game ball enters specific area 140b during the small win game, winning a type 2 big win, a 10R big win game is executed as shown in (g) of FIG. 76, and the game state after the 10R big win game is set to the C time-saving game state as shown in (h) of FIG. 76.

In addition, the probability of the second start port 122 being long-opened in the C time-saving game state is 1/1. In other words, in the C time-saving game state, when a game ball is entered into the gate 124 and a normal map lottery is executed, the second start port 122 is always long-opened. Therefore, in the C time-saving game state, the player needs to hit to the right in order to enter the game ball into the gate 124. When the C time-saving game state is set, the number of normal map changes is set to 100 times as a time-saving end condition. In other words, when the C time-saving game state is set, the player can instantly and reliably long-open the second start port 122 by hitting to the right when the C time-saving game state is set.

Even in the time-saving C game state, if the player is hitting from the right, the game ball will always enter the second starting hole 122 during the long opening, and the special 2 variation will always result in a big win or small win. In other words, when the game transitions to the time-saving C game state, the big prize game will be executed immediately. The probability of determining the big win or small win pattern at this time is the same as in the time-saving A game state and the time-saving B game state. Although not shown here, time-saving skips and blowouts can occur even in the time-saving C game state. In this case, the game transitions to a non-time-saving game state, just like the time-saving A game state and the time-saving B game state.

As described above, in this embodiment, once the game transitions to the C time-saving game state, there is a 75% probability that the 10R big prize game and the C time-saving game state will loop. Furthermore, in the C time-saving game state, the probability of the second starting hole 122 opening long is 1/1, so that the big prize game can be executed immediately after the C time-saving game state is set. Therefore, the player can win a large number of prize balls in a short period of time after transitioning to the C time-saving game state.

In addition, even if the game shifts from the C-time shortened game state to the B-time shortened game state, there is a possibility of returning to the C-time shortened game state after playing the 10R major role again, which is a so-called "catch-up chance," and increases the excitement of the game.

Furthermore, if the time-saving feature runs out in the B time-saving game state or the A time-saving game state, the game is set to a non-time-saving game state. As mentioned above, the non-time-saving game state may transition to the C time-saving game state if a specific miss occurs. Therefore, even if the time-saving feature runs out, it is possible to allow the player to continue playing, which can increase the player's desire to continue playing.

Next, the processing in the main control board 300 according to the embodiment will be described. Note that, below, only the changes from the above reference example will be described, and other processing will not be described.

Figure 77 is a flowchart explaining the subcommand group set processing in the main control board 300 according to the embodiment. The subcommand group set processing according to the embodiment is executed in place of the subcommand group set processing according to the above reference example. Note that the subcommand group set processing according to the embodiment differs from the above reference example in that the processing of step S110-23 is executed, but the other processing is the same as the above reference example. Therefore, the processing of step S110-23 will be explained here.

(Step S110-23)
If the state at the time of power cut is not the special symbol variation waiting state, that is, if the first special symbol display 160 or the second special symbol display 162 is displaying a varying or stopped pattern at the time of power cut, the main CPU 300a executes the special symbol confirmation designation command setting process and ends the sub-command group set process. As a result, if a power cut occurs while the first special symbol display 160 or the second special symbol display 162 is displaying a varying or stopped pattern and the power is then turned on again, the special symbol confirmation designation command is transmitted from the main control board 300 to the sub-control board 330.

Figure 78 is a flowchart explaining the special symbol change waiting process in the main control board 300 according to the embodiment. The special symbol change waiting process according to the embodiment is executed in place of the special symbol change waiting process according to the above reference example. Note that the special symbol change waiting process according to the embodiment differs from the above reference example in the process of step S613, but the other processes are the same as those of the above reference example. Therefore, the process of step S613 will be explained here.

(Step S613)
When the big role lottery is executed in step S611, the main CPU 300a executes a special symbol determination process for determining the type of the special symbol. This special symbol determination process will be described with reference to FIG.

Figure 79 is a flowchart explaining the special symbol pattern determination process in the main control board 300 in this embodiment.

(Step S613-1)
The main CPU 300a loads the type of hold read out in the big role lottery.

(Step S613-3)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the reserved type is the special reserved type 1. As a result, if it is judged to be the special reserved type 1, the process proceeds to step S613-5, and if it is judged not to be the special reserved type 1, the process proceeds to step S613-21.

(Step S613-5)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the result of the big prize lottery is a big win or not. If it is judged to be a big win, the process proceeds to step S631-7, and if it is judged not to be a big win, the process proceeds to step S613-9.

(Step S613-7)
The main CPU 300a sets the special 1 winning symbol random number determination table a, and transfers the process to step S613-15.

(Step S613-9)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the result of the big role lottery is a specific miss. If it is judged to be a specific miss, the process proceeds to step S631-11. If it is judged not to be a specific miss, the process proceeds to step S613-13.

(Step S613-11)
The main CPU 300a sets the special 1 winning symbol random number determination table b, and transfers the process to step S613-15.

(Step S613-13)
The main CPU 300a saves the special symbol X, and moves the process to step S613-19.

(Step S613-15)
The main CPU 300a sets the special winning symbol random number determination table c.

(Step S613-17)
The main CPU 300a refers to the tables set in the above steps S613-7, S613-11, S613-15, and steps S613-23 and S613-27 described below, to determine the type of special symbol.

(Step S613-19)
The main CPU 300a sets a symbol type designation command indicating the type of the determined special symbol, and ends the special symbol determination process.

(Step S613-21)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the result of the big prize lottery is a big win or not. If it is judged as a big win, the process proceeds to step S631-23, and if it is judged as not a big win, the process proceeds to step S613-25.

(Step S613-23)
The main CPU 300a sets the special 2 winning symbol random number determination table a, and transfers the process to step S613-15.

(Step S613-25)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the result of the big role lottery is a small win or not. If it is judged to be a small win, the process proceeds to step S631-27, and if it is judged not to be a small win, the process proceeds to step S613-29.

(Step S613-27)
The main CPU 300a sets the special 2 winning symbol random number determination table b, and transfers the process to step S613-15.

(Step S613-29)
The main CPU 300a saves the special symbol Y, and moves the process to step S613-19.

Figure 80 is a flowchart explaining the special symbol stop symbol display process in the main control board 300 according to the embodiment. The special symbol stop symbol display process according to the embodiment is executed in place of the special symbol stop symbol display process according to the reference example above.

(Step S630-1)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the timer value of the special game timer set in the above step S620-21 is "0". If it is judged that the timer value of the special game timer is not "0", the main CPU 300a ends the special symbol stop symbol display process, and if it is judged that the timer value of the special game timer is "0", the process proceeds to step S630-3.

(Step S630-3)
The main CPU 300a checks the result of the big role lottery.

(Step S630-5)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the result of the big prize lottery is a big win or not. If it is judged to be a big win, the process proceeds to step S630-19, and if it is judged not to be a big win, the process proceeds to step S631.

(Step S631)
The main CPU 300a executes a number-of-times cut management process, which will be described later.

(Step S630-9)
The main CPU 300a updates the variable state.

(Step S630-11)
The main CPU 300a sets in the transmission buffer a game state confirmation command at the time of special symbol determination, which indicates the game state when the special symbol is determined.

(Step S630-13)
The main CPU 300a sets in the transmission buffer a number command for transmitting the counter values of the special 2 time-saving count cut counter and the total time-saving count cut counter updated in step S631 above, i.e., the remaining number of times, to the sub-control board 330.

(Step S630-15)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the result of the big role lottery is a small win or not. If it is judged to be a small win, the process proceeds to step S630-18, and if it is judged not to be a small win, the process proceeds to step S630-16.

(Step S630-16)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the result of the big role lottery is a specific miss. If it is judged to be a specific miss, the process proceeds to step S632, and if it is judged not to be a specific miss, the process proceeds to step S630-17.

(Step S632)
The main CPU 300a executes a specific failure state setting process, which will be described in detail later.

(Step S630-17)
The main CPU 300a updates the special game management phase to "00H" and ends the special symbol stop symbol display process. This ends the special game management process based on the reservation of 1, and if special reservation 1 or special reservation 2 is stored, a process for starting the variable display of the special symbol based on the next reservation is performed.

(Step S630-18)
The main CPU 300a stores (saves) the game state at the time when the small winning symbol is determined in a storage area of the main RAM 300c.

(Step S630-19)
The main CPU 300a resets (sets) the gaming state to the initial state, that is, the non-time-shortened gaming state.

(Step S630-21)
The main CPU 300a sets data in a special electric role activation RAM set table according to the type of the determined special symbol.

(Step S630-23)
The main CPU 300a performs a process for setting the maximum number of times that the special electric role is operated. Specifically, the data set in the above step S630-21 is referred to, and a predetermined number (counter value corresponding to the type of special symbol = number of rounds) is set as a counter value in the maximum number of times that the special electric role is operated counter. The maximum number of times that the special electric role is operated counter indicates the number of rounds that can be executed in the big role game that will start from now. Meanwhile, the main RAM 300c is provided with a counter for the number of times that the special electric role is continuously operated, and the current number of rounds is managed by adding "1" to the counter value of the counter for the number of times that the special electric role is continuously operated at the start of each round game. Here, a process for resetting (updating to "0") the counter value of the counter for the number of times that the special electric role is continuously operated is also executed with the start of the big role game.

(Step S630-25)
The main CPU 300a refers to the data set in step S630-21 and saves a predetermined opening time as a timer value in the special game timer.

(Step S630-27)
The main CPU 300a sets in the transmission buffer an opening designation command for transmitting the start of a big win game or a small win game to the sub-control board 330. Note that this opening designation command is provided for each opening time, and here, the opening designation command corresponding to the opening time saved in the above step S630-25 is set in the transmission buffer.

(Step S630-29)
If the result of the big win lottery confirmed in step S630-3 is a big win, the main CPU 300a updates the special game management phase to "03H", and if it is a small win, updates the special game management phase to "07H" and ends the special symbol stop symbol display process. This starts the big win game or small win game.

Figure 81 is a flowchart explaining the cutoff management process in the main control board 300 according to the embodiment.

(Step S631-1)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the game state is advantageous or not. If it is judged to be advantageous, the process proceeds to step S631-3, and if it is judged not to be advantageous, the process proceeds to step S631-15.

(Step S631-3)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the special 2 variation has been executed. If it is judged that the special 2 variation has been executed, the process proceeds to step S631-5, and if it is judged that the special 2 variation has not been executed (the special 1 variation has been executed), the process proceeds to step S631-7.

(Step S631-5)
The main CPU 300a decrements the counter value of the special 2 time-saving cut-off counter.

(Step S631-7)
The main CPU 300a decrements the counter value of the total time-saving cut-off counter.

(Step S631-9)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the number of special 2 time-saving times or the total number of time-saving times is 0. If it is judged that the number of special 2 time-saving times or the total number of time-saving times is 0, the process proceeds to step S631-11, and if it is judged that neither the number of special 2 time-saving times nor the total number of time-saving times is 0, the number-cut management process is terminated.

(Step S631-11)
The main CPU 300a sets the game state to a non-time-saving game state. Here, the counter values of the special 2 time-saving count cut counter, the total time-saving count cut counter, and the normal game fluctuation count counter are reset (to 0).

(Step S631-13)
The main CPU 300a sets a game state change designation command indicating the game state, and ends the number-off management process.

(Step S631-15)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the counter value of the ceiling count counter is greater than 0. In this embodiment, a so-called ceiling function is provided in which, after a big role game, if the result of the big role lottery is determined a predetermined number of times (for example, 656 times) without winning a big win, the game state transitions to a C time-saving game state. The ceiling count counter is a counter that counts the number of times remaining until the ceiling function is activated and the transition to the C time-saving game state occurs. If the ceiling count counter is greater than 0, the main CPU 300a transfers the process to step S631-17, and if the ceiling count counter is 0, ends the count-off management process.

(Step S631-17)
The main CPU 300a decrements the ceiling number counter.

(Step S631-19)
The main CPU 300a sets a ceiling number command indicating the counter value of the ceiling number counter updated in step S631-17.

(Step S631-21)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the counter value of the ceiling number counter is 0. As a result, if it is judged that the ceiling number counter is 0, the process proceeds to step S631-23, and if it is judged that the ceiling number counter is not 0, the number cut management process is terminated.

(Step S631-23)
The main CPU 300a sets the gaming state to the C-time shortened gaming state.

(Step S631-25)
The main CPU 300a sets a game state change designation command and ends the number-cut management process.

Figure 82 is a flowchart explaining the specific failure state setting process in the main control board 300 according to the embodiment.

(Step S632-1)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the current gaming state is a non-time-reduction gaming state. If it is judged to be a non-time-reduction gaming state, the process proceeds to step S632-3, and if it is judged not to be a non-time-reduction gaming state, the specific loss state setting process is terminated.

(Step S632-3)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the type of the special symbol stopped and displayed is the special symbol Xa. If it is judged to be the special symbol Xa, the process proceeds to step S632-5. If it is judged not to be the special symbol Xa, the process proceeds to step S632-7.

(Step S632-5)
The main CPU 300a sets the game state to the C time-saving game state, sets the time-saving end condition, and ends the specific failure state setting process. Here, as the time-saving end condition, the special 2 time-saving count cut counter is set to 1, the total time-saving count cut counter is set to 10, and the normal variation count cut counter is set to 100.

(Step S632-7)
The main CPU 300a sets the game state to a micro-time-shortened game state, and ends the specific loss state setting process.

Figure 83 is a flowchart explaining the large prize opening end wait process in the main control board 300 according to the embodiment. The large prize opening end wait process according to the embodiment is executed in place of the large prize opening end wait process according to the reference example above.

(Step S670-1)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the timer value of the special game timer saved in the above step S660-7 is not "0". If it is judged that the timer value of the special game timer is not "0", the main CPU 300a ends the waiting process for the end of the special winning port, and if it is judged that the timer value of the special game timer is "0", the process proceeds to step S671.

(Step S671)
The main CPU 300a executes a state setting process for setting the game state after the big win game ends. This state setting process will be described with reference to FIG.

(Step S670-5)
The main CPU 300a sets in the transmission buffer a game state change designation command for transmitting the game state and the variable state that are set after the end of the big role game.

(Step S670-7)
The main CPU 300a sets in the transmission buffer a number designation command corresponding to the number of special 2 time reductions, the total number of time reductions, and the number of normal game fluctuations saved in step S671.

(Step S670-9)
The main CPU 300a updates the special game management phase to "00H" and ends the waiting process for the end of the special winning slot. As a result, if the special 1 reserve or special 2 reserve is stored, the variable display of the special symbol is resumed.

Figure 84 is a flowchart explaining the state setting process in the main control board 300 in this embodiment.

(Step S671-1)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the special game management phase is 06H, that is, whether the big prize game has ended. If it is judged that the big prize game has ended, the process proceeds to step S671-3, and if it is judged that the big prize game has not ended (the small prize game has ended), the process proceeds to step S671-7.

(Step S671-3)
The main CPU 300a sets the game state after the big win game by referring to the game state setting table based on the type of the special symbol stopped and displayed. Here, the counter values of the special 2 time reduction number cut counter, the total time reduction number cut counter and the normal symbol variation number cut counter are set based on the set game state or the type of the special symbol stopped and displayed.

(Step S671-5)
The main CPU 300a sets a predetermined value (here, 656 times) in the ceiling number counter, and ends the state setting process.

(Step S671-7)
The main CPU 300a resets the game state saved in the above step S630-18 and ends the state setting process. As a result, if a small win is won but a two-type big win is not won, the game state at the time of the determination of the small win pattern is set. In this embodiment, when the time-saving game state is set, the number of special 2 time-saving times is always set to one as the time-saving end condition. Therefore, since a small win can only be won by a special 2 variation, the fact that a small win game is executed in the time-saving game state means that a special 2 variation is executed. When a special 2 variation is executed in the time-saving game state, the non-time-saving game state is set in the above step S631-11 when the special pattern is determined. In other words, when a small win game is executed in the time-saving game state, the non-time-saving game state is stored in the above step S630-18. Therefore, if a small win is won in the time-saving game state, but the small win game ends without winning the type 2 big win, the game state after the small win game is set to a non-time-saving game state.

Figure 85 is a flowchart explaining the normal pattern change waiting process in the main control board 300 according to the embodiment. The normal pattern change waiting process according to the embodiment is executed in place of the normal pattern change waiting process according to the reference example above. Note that the normal pattern change waiting process according to the embodiment differs from the normal pattern change waiting process according to the reference example above in steps S710-1, S710-9, S710-11, and the processes after step S710-20. Therefore, here, steps S710-1, S710-9, S710-11, and the processes after step S710-20 are explained, and explanations of other processes are omitted.

(Step S710-1)
The main CPU 300a loads the counter value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter and judges whether the counter value is "0", that is, whether the normal symbol reserved is "0". If it is judged that the counter value is not "0", the process proceeds to step S710-3, and if it is judged that the counter value is "0", the process proceeds to step S710-31.

(Step S710-9)
The main CPU 300a executes the normal symbol variation number determination process. Here, a normal symbol variation pattern number determination table is provided for determining the normal symbol variation pattern number. The normal symbol variation pattern number determination table is provided for each game state and for each type of normal symbol. Here, the normal symbol variation pattern number is determined by referring to the normal symbol variation pattern number determination table corresponding to the current game state and the determined type of normal symbol. Note that the normal symbol variation pattern number specifies the time for which the normal symbol is displayed on the normal symbol display 168, i.e., the normal symbol variation time.

(Step S710-11)
The main CPU 300a sets the normal pattern variation pattern command corresponding to the normal pattern variation pattern number determined in the above step S710-9 in the transmission buffer. As a result, at the start of the normal pattern variation display, the normal pattern variation pattern command is transmitted from the main control board 300 to the sub-control board 330.

(Step S710-20)
The main CPU 300a stores the current game state as the game state at the start of the normal game fluctuation.

(Step S710-21)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the current game state is an advantageous state (time-shortened game state A, time-shortened game state B, or time-shortened game state C). If it is judged to be an advantageous state, the process proceeds to step S710-23, and if it is judged not to be an advantageous state, the process proceeds to step S710-29.

(Step S710-23)
The main CPU 300a decrements the counter value of the normal fluctuation cut-off counter.

(Step S710-25)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the counter value updated in the above step S710-23 is 0. If it is judged that the counter value is 0, the process proceeds to step S710-27, and if it is judged that the counter value is not 0, the process proceeds to step S710-29.

(Step S710-27)
The main CPU 300a sets the game state to a non-time-saving game state. In addition, the counter values of the special 2 time-saving count cut counter, the total time-saving count cut counter, and the normal game fluctuation count counter are reset (to 0).

(Step S710-29)
The main CPU 300a updates the normal game management phase to "01H" and ends the normal pattern change waiting process.

(Step S710-31)
The main CPU 300a sets a regular customer waiting designation command in the transmission buffer and ends the regular pattern change waiting process.

Figure 86 is a flow chart explaining the normal pattern changing process in the main control board 300 according to the embodiment. The normal pattern changing process according to the embodiment is executed in place of the normal pattern changing process according to the reference example. Note that the normal pattern changing process according to the embodiment is the same as the normal pattern changing process according to the reference example in steps S720-1 to S720-9, but differs from the normal pattern changing process according to the reference example in steps S720-11 and after. Therefore, the process from step S720-11 onwards will be explained here, and the process before step S720-11 will not be explained.

(Step S720-11)
The main CPU 300a judges whether the second start hole 122 is long-opened. Whether the second start hole 122 is long-opened or not is judged by a combination of the game state at the start of the normal pattern variation and the type of the normal pattern (winning pattern) to be stopped. As a result, if it is judged that the second start hole 122 is long-opened, the process is transferred to step S720-15, and if it is judged that the second start hole 122 is not long-opened, the process is transferred to step S720-13.

(Step S720-13)
The main CPU 300a sets a timer value equivalent to 0.4 seconds as the normal symbol variation stop time in the normal game timer.

(Step S720-15)
The main CPU 300a sets a timer value equivalent to 5.0 seconds as the normal symbol variation stop time in the normal game timer.

(Step S720-17)
The main CPU 300a sets a normal symbol stop command, which indicates that the stopped display of the normal symbols has begun, in the transmission buffer.

(Step S720-19)
The main CPU 300a updates the normal game management phase to "02H" and ends the normal pattern variation processing.

Figure 87 is a flowchart explaining the normal symbol stop symbol display process in the main control board 300 according to the embodiment. The normal symbol stop symbol display process according to the embodiment is executed in place of the normal symbol stop symbol display process according to the above reference example. Note that the normal symbol stop symbol display process according to the embodiment differs from the normal symbol stop symbol display process according to the above reference example in that the process of step S730-10 is executed between the processes of steps S730-9 and S730-11, but the other processes are the same as those of the above reference example. Therefore, the process of step S730-10 will be explained here, and the explanation of the other processes will be omitted.

(Step S730-10)
The main CPU 300a sets a normal power release command, which indicates the start of the auxiliary game, in the transmission buffer.

As described above, in this embodiment, in the normal state, the game progresses with the special 1 change, and in the advantageous state, the game progresses with the normal map change. Therefore, in the normal state, a change presentation corresponding to the special 1 change is executed, and in the advantageous state, a change presentation corresponding to the normal map change is executed. Below, an example of the change presentation in each of the normal state and the advantageous state is explained.

Figure 88 is a diagram illustrating an example of a presentation mode according to the embodiment. As described above, in this embodiment, one of five game states is set in the main control board 300 during play. In the sub-control board 330, a presentation mode corresponding to the game state set in the main control board 300 is set.

Note that the presentation mode specifies the type of presentation to be executed, and a presentation corresponding to the currently set presentation mode is executed. For example, during play, a background image corresponding to the currently set presentation mode is displayed on the main presentation display unit 200a, and background music corresponding to the presentation mode is output. Therefore, the player can identify the current game state by viewing the presentation corresponding to the presentation mode.

Here, five game states are provided, and therefore five presentation modes are provided. Specifically, when the game state is set to a non-time-saving game state in the main control board 300, the presentation mode is set to chance mode in the sub-control board 330. Similarly, when the game state is a minute time-saving game state, an A-time-saving game state, a B-time-saving game state, or a C-time-saving game state, the presentation mode is set to normal mode, A mode, B mode, or C mode, respectively.

When the game state is a non-time-saving game state and the presentation mode is a chance mode, the variation presentation is executed for the special 1 variation. Note that the variation presentation is executed for the special 1 variation, meaning that a variation presentation is executed that suggests and notifies the result of the big role lottery related to the special 1 variation. Similarly, when the game state is a slight time-saving game state and the presentation mode is a normal mode, the variation presentation is executed for the special 1 variation. Also, when the game state is an A time-saving game state, a B time-saving game state, or a C time-saving game state, and the presentation mode is an A mode, a B mode, or a C mode, the variation presentation is executed for all normal variations.

Figure 89 is a diagram illustrating an example of a normal mode variable presentation according to the embodiment. As described above, the normal mode is a presentation mode corresponding to the micro-time-saving game state, and in the micro-time-saving game state, a variable presentation is executed for the special 1 variable. When the special 1 variable is executed during the normal mode, a variable presentation that suggests the result of the big role lottery is executed. During the variable presentation, as shown in (a) to (e) of Figure 89, multiple types of presentation patterns 210a, 210b, and 210c are displayed in a variable manner and then stopped, and the result of the big role lottery is notified to the player by the combination of the presentation patterns 210a, 210b, and 210c that are finally stopped and displayed. Also, during the variable presentation, as shown in Figure 89 (a), the first mini pattern 220 and the second mini pattern 221 are displayed on the main presentation display unit 200a.

The first mini symbol 220, like the performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c, notifies the state of the special symbol fluctuation and the result of the big prize lottery. For example, the first mini symbol 220 is provided with an even number symbol and an odd number symbol, and when a losing symbol is displayed as a stopped symbol on the first special symbol display 160 or the second special symbol display 162, an even number symbol is displayed as the first mini symbol 220. On the other hand, when a small win symbol or a big win symbol is displayed as a stopped symbol on the first special symbol display 160 or the second special symbol display 162, an odd number symbol is displayed as the first mini symbol 220.

In addition, while the changing pattern is being displayed on the first special pattern display device 160 or the second special pattern display device 162, the first mini pattern 220 is displayed changing. Therefore, the changing and stationary display of the first mini pattern 220 is synchronized with the changing pattern display on the first special pattern display device 160 or the second special pattern display device 162. In the figure, the downward arrow on the first mini pattern 220 indicates that the first mini pattern 220 is being displayed changing.

In this embodiment, the first mini pattern 220 is shared between the Special 1 variation and the Special 2 variation. Therefore, the first mini pattern 220 is displayed in the same location when the Special 1 variation is being executed and when the Special 2 variation is being executed. This limits the display range compared to when the corresponding mini patterns are displayed for the Special 1 variation and the Special 2 variation, and makes it less likely that the visibility of the performance image displayed on the main performance display section 200a will be impaired. However, separate mini patterns may be provided for the Special 1 variation and the Special 2 variation.

The second mini pattern 221 notifies the state of the regular pattern change and the result of the regular pattern lottery. For example, the second mini pattern 221 is provided with a plurality of patterns such as circles, and a pattern corresponding to the type of regular pattern displayed on the regular pattern display 168 is displayed in a stopped state. Note that while the regular pattern display 168 is displaying a changing pattern, the second mini pattern 221 is displayed in a flashing manner.

Although detailed explanations are omitted, in this embodiment, as in the above-mentioned performance reference example, a no-reach variation pattern and a reach variation pattern are provided as the execution patterns of the variation performance. In addition, various advance notice performances are executed during the variation performance. The execution pattern of the advance notice performance and the reach development performance indicates the reliability of the jackpot. In the variation performance targeting the special 1 variation, the combination patterns of the performance patterns 210a, 210b, and 210c that are finally displayed are broadly classified into a jackpot pattern, a miss pattern, and a special pattern.

The big win pattern is a pattern in which the performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c are stopped and displayed as the same symbol, and the losing pattern is a stopped display pattern in which at least one of the performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c is different from the other two. Also, the performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c are provided with nine types of normal symbols, each with a number from 1 to 9, and during the normal mode, only the normal symbols are displayed and stopped. In contrast, during the chance mode, the performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c that are displayed and stopped and displayed include special symbols in addition to normal symbols. The special pattern is a combination pattern in which the performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c that are finally stopped and displayed are all special symbols.

Figure 90 is a diagram illustrating an example of a chance mode variable presentation according to an embodiment. Although not shown in Figure 90, during chance mode, a background image different from that during normal mode is displayed on the main presentation display unit 200a. During chance mode (non-time-saving game state), if a specific miss occurs and the special pattern Xa is determined, a special variable presentation is executed. In the special variable presentation, the combination pattern of the presentation patterns 210a, 210b, and 210c that are finally stopped and displayed becomes the special pattern.

Specifically, when the special variable effect starts, as shown in FIG. 90(a), the variable display of the effect patterns 210a, 210b, and 210c and the variable display of the first mini pattern 220 start. After that, as shown in FIG. 90(b), the effect patterns 210a, 210b, and 210c are displayed temporarily stopped. At this time, the combination pattern displayed temporarily stopped is a losing pattern, and while the temporary stop display is on, the three effect patterns 210a, 210b, and 210c are slightly shaking. Note that in this state, the variable display of the first mini pattern 220 continues.

After that, as shown in FIG. 90(c), the performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c rotate 180 degrees, and the reverse sides of the performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c are displayed. At this time, the letter "C" is displayed on the performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c, indicating the C time-saving play state. Then, as shown in FIG. 90(d), the performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c are displayed as stopped, and the first mini symbol 220 is displayed as a specified odd number, and the special variable performance ends.

In this way, when the special symbol Xa, which is a specific losing symbol, is won in the non-time-saving game state and the special symbol Xa is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 160, the game state transitions from the non-time-saving game state to the C time-saving game state. When the game state transitions to the C time-saving game state, as shown in FIG. 90(e), a right-hit notification effect is executed to encourage the player to hit to the right.

Next, we will explain the variation effects in the advantageous state. As described above, in the advantageous state, a variation effect corresponding to the normal map variation is executed. In other words, in the advantageous state, a variation effect is executed based on the result of the normal map lottery. Note that in this embodiment, the advantageous states are the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, and the C time-saving game state, but here we will explain the variation effects in the B time-saving game state.

Figure 91 is a diagram illustrating an example of a variable presentation in B mode according to an embodiment. During B mode, as shown in Figure 91 (a), the remaining number of times the normal pattern will change until the B time-saving game state ends is displayed. Also, during an advantageous state, as in the normal state, the variable presentation displays the display patterns 210a, 210b, and 210c and stops, and the result of the normal pattern lottery is notified to the player based on the combination pattern of the display patterns 210a, 210b, and 210c that are finally stopped and displayed. Note that the combination patterns of the display patterns 210a, 210b, and 210c that are stopped and displayed during an advantageous state are broadly divided into jackpot patterns and miss patterns.

A big win pattern during an advantageous state is one in which the performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c are stopped and displayed in the same pattern, suggesting and notifying that a long opening of the second starting hole 122 has been won. Also, a losing pattern during an advantageous state is one in which at least one of the performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c is stopped and displayed in a different pattern from the other two, suggesting and notifying that a short opening of the second starting hole 122 has been won.

For example, as shown in FIG. 91(a), assume that the normal pattern change is started when the performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c are displayed frozen in a losing pattern. In this case, as shown in FIG. 91(b), the performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c are displayed frozen, and the second mini-pattern 221 starts to be displayed frozen. After that, as shown in FIG. 91(c), the performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c and the second mini-pattern 221 are displayed frozen.

Note that here, the display patterns 210a, 210b, and 210c are different during the normal state and during the advantageous state, but the display patterns 210a, 210b, and 210c may be the same or different in all game states. Also, the variation effect for the normal pattern variation is provided with a no-reach variation pattern and a reach variation pattern, just like the variation effect for the special 1 variation, and the reliability of winning the long opening of the second starting hole 122 is indicated.

Here, in a favorable state, if the second starting hole 122 is opened long and the game ball enters the second starting hole 122, a big win or a small win is always won. If a small win is won, the game ball will enter the specific area 140b in the second big winning hole 128 if it is launched properly, and a type 2 big win is won.

Therefore, as described above, winning the long opening of the second start port 122 in an advantageous state can be said to be equivalent to winning a jackpot. However, if the player stops firing the game ball after winning the long opening of the second start port 122, the game ball cannot enter the second start port 122. In addition, when the game ball enters the second start port 122, a special 2 variation is executed. If a small jackpot is won in this special 2 variation, a small jackpot game is executed, but if the firing of the game ball is stopped during this small jackpot game, the game ball cannot enter the specific area 140b, and the player cannot win a type 2 jackpot.

As such, since the period during which the game ball must flow down to a specific position is limited, if the player is not properly informed of this period, the player will be disadvantaged. Therefore, in this embodiment, the operation instruction presentation is executed as follows to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

Figure 92 is a diagram for explaining an example of an operation instruction presentation according to an embodiment. As shown in Figures 92(a) and (b), when the presentation starts with the start of the normal pattern change, the display of the presentation patterns 210a, 210b, and 210c changes and the display of the second mini pattern 221 changes. If the long opening of the second starting hole 122 is won, the presentation patterns 210a, 210b, and 210c are displayed as the same pattern as shown in Figure 92(c). Also, when the normal pattern is displayed as a stopped pattern on the normal pattern display 168, the second mini pattern 221 is displayed as a stopped pattern.

After that, as shown in FIG. 92(d), a right-hit instruction image 240 is displayed on the main performance display unit 200a. This right-hit instruction image 240 is an image that encourages the player to place the game ball into the second starting hole 122. While this right-hit instruction image 240 is displayed, an audio message such as "Please hit with the right hand" is output. In addition, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the right-hit instruction image 240 was displayed, a notification image 242 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 92(e).

The notification image 242 is an image that prominently shows the position of the second starting hole 122 into which the game ball should enter on the surface of the game board 108. In addition, the notification image 242 counts down the time until the second starting hole 122 opens, as shown in Figures 92 (e) and (f).

As shown in FIG. 92(g), even after the second starting hole 122 is opened, the right-hit instruction image 240 and the notification image 242 continue to be displayed. Here, the notification image 242 counts down the time until the second starting hole 122 is opened, but for example, after the second starting hole 122 is opened, the remaining time until the second starting hole 122 is fully opened may be displayed. In any case, the notification image 242 may be an image related to the opening period of the second starting hole 122. Therefore, here, the time until the second starting hole 122 is opened is displayed in numbers in the notification image 242, but the remaining time may be visually grasped, for example, by a meter or the like.

After that, when the game ball enters the second starting hole 122, a re-changing performance is executed. In the re-changing performance, as shown in FIG. 92(h), the performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c are displayed re-changing, and as shown in FIG. 92(i), the performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c with the number 7 written on them are displayed stopped.

Here, in the re-changing performance, if a small win is won by the special 2 change and special pattern b is determined as the small win pattern, or if a big win is won by the special 2 change and special pattern D is determined as the big win pattern, performance patterns 210a, 210b, and 210c with the number 7 written on them are stopped and displayed. On the other hand, if a small win is won by the special 2 change and special pattern a is determined as the small win pattern, or if a big win is won and special pattern C is determined as the big win pattern, performance patterns 210a, 210b, and 210c with numbers other than 7 written on them are stopped and displayed.

As described above, if special symbols a and C are won, a 3R big prize game is played, and if special symbols b and D are won, a 10R big prize game is played. Therefore, in the re-changing performance, the stopped display of performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c suggests the number of rounds in the big prize game. After that, as shown in FIG. 92(j), a directional indication image 244 labeled "hit right" is displayed, and a sound is also heard to encourage the player to hit right.

As described above, in the embodiment, the right hit instruction image 240, the notification image 242, and the direction indication image 244 are displayed as operation instruction presentations. The timing at which the right hit instruction image 240, the notification image 242, and the direction indication image 244 are displayed in the operation instruction presentation is described in detail below.

Figure 93 is a time chart of the operation instruction presentation according to the embodiment. As shown in Figure 93 (a), after the normal pattern display 168 displays the patterns for a predetermined change time, the normal pattern A is displayed stationary. The normal pattern change stop time when the normal pattern A is selected, i.e., the fixed time, is 5 seconds (see S720-15). When the fixed time has elapsed, an auxiliary game is executed in which the second start hole 122 is opened. In this auxiliary game, the time before the normal power is opened, which corresponds to the opening time, is set to 3 seconds, and then, as shown in Figure 93 (b), the second start hole 122 is opened for 2.9 seconds x 2 times.

When a game ball enters the open second starting hole 122, as shown in FIG. 93(c), the second special symbol display 162 starts displaying a varying pattern, and after a predetermined varying time has elapsed, the special symbol is displayed as still. The time during which the special symbol is displayed as still, i.e., the fixed time, is 0.5 seconds. When the small prize symbol is displayed as still, the small prize game starts as the fixed time has elapsed. In this small prize game, an opening time is set, as shown in FIG. 93(d), and then the second large prize hole 128 is repeatedly opened and closed.

As described above, when normal games and special games are played, the right hit instruction image 240 starts to be displayed when the normal symbols are stopped, as shown in FIG. 93(e). Then, while the normal symbols are stopped, the notification image 242 starts to be displayed, as shown in FIG. 93(f). Here, the notification image 242 starts to be displayed a predetermined time (e.g., 4 seconds) before the second start hole 122 starts to open. The right hit instruction image 240 and the notification image 242 are displayed until the game ball enters the second start hole 122. In other words, when the game ball enters the second start hole 122, the right hit instruction image 240 and the notification image 242 are hidden.

In addition, while the second special symbol display 162 is displaying the changing symbols, the direction indicator image 244 starts to be displayed, as shown in FIG. 93(g). Here, the direction indicator image 244 starts to be displayed a predetermined time before the timing when the second large prize opening 128 is first opened during a small prize game.

When a big win is won by the special 2 variation, the big win game starts without going through the small win game. In this case, the direction indication image 244 does not have to be displayed. Also, for example, when a small win game is being played, the direction indication image 244 may continue to be displayed until the game ball enters the specific area 140b.

In this way, the right hit instruction image 240, the notification image 242, and the direction indication image 244, which suggest the appropriate launch operation of the game ball, are displayed in stages in the operation instruction presentation, thereby reducing the risk of causing disadvantage to the player. Note that the display contents of the right hit instruction image 240, the notification image 242, and the direction indication image 244 in the embodiment are not particularly limited, and can be changed in design as appropriate.

During play, even if the player performs the firing operation appropriately, the game ball may enter an unintended area. For example, in an advantageous state, a right hit is required, but even if the player performs the right hit appropriately, the game ball may collide with a nail or the like and enter the first game area 116a. Since the special 1 variation and the normal map variation can be executed simultaneously in parallel, if a game ball that has entered the first game area 116a during an advantageous state enters the first starting hole 120, the special 1 variation may be executed in parallel with the normal map variation. In this case, if the variation time related to the special 1 variation is long, there is a risk that the player will suffer a disadvantage.

Figure 94 is a time chart of the final change in the advantageous state in the comparative example. In the advantageous state, the number of normal map changes is set as the time-saving end condition, and when the number of normal map changes reaches a specified number in each advantageous state, the game state transitions to a non-time-saving game state. In the embodiment, the number of normal map changes is set to 70, 50, and 100 as the time-saving end condition for the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, and the C time-saving game state, respectively.

Therefore, the 70th, 50th, and 100th regular pattern changes in the A time-saving play state, B time-saving play state, and C time-saving play state will be the final regular pattern changes, respectively. As shown in FIG. 94(a), assume that the final regular pattern change is started in an advantageous state. In this case, as shown in FIG. 94(c), the game state transitions to a non-time-saving play state at the start of the final regular pattern change. In other words, during the final regular pattern change, the game state is already set to a non-time-saving play state.

In addition, if the long opening of the second start hole 122 is won in the final normal pattern change, the second start hole 122 is opened for 2.9 seconds x 2 times, as shown in (b) of FIG. 94. This long opening of the second start hole 122 is executed during a non-time-saving game state, but even in this case, if a game ball enters the second start hole 122, a big win or small win is always won, and after a 3R big win game or a 10R big win game, the game state is set to a favorable state again.

If a game ball enters the first starting hole 120 during the final normal variation, a special 1 variation will start, as shown in FIG. 94 (d). At the start of this special 1 variation, the game state is set to a non-time-saving game state. In the comparative example, during the non-time-saving game state, a variation presentation of a reach variation pattern is executed with a predetermined probability, and a long variation time corresponding to the reach variation pattern can be selected. When a long variation time is selected, there is a risk that the long opening of the second starting hole 122 and the special 1 variation will be executed in parallel, as shown in FIG. 94 (b) and (d).

In the comparative example, as in the present embodiment, the special 2 variation is configured to be executed in priority to the special 1 variation, and the special 1 variation and the special 2 variation are not executed in parallel. In other words, the special 1 variation and the special 2 variation are executed selectively. In addition, the maximum number of special 2 reserved memories is 0. Therefore, if the special 1 variation is executed during the long opening of the second start port 122, even if a game ball enters the second start port 122, the special 2 variation will not be executed as shown in (e) of FIG. 94. As a result, even if the long opening of the second start port 122 is won due to the final normal variation, the small win game or the big role game will not be executed as shown in (f) of FIG. 94, which may cause a disadvantage to the player.

Note that, here, we have explained the case where Special 1 change is started during the final normal map change, but for example, if the change time of Special 1 change in an advantageous state is set to a long time, the opportunity to execute Special 2 change will be taken away for the same reason as above. For example, let us say that immediately after the advantageous state is set, the long opening of the second starting port 122 is won. Also, let us say that at this time, Special 1 change is started during the normal map change, and the change time of Special 1 change is a long time. In this case, because the long opening of the second starting port 122 is executed in parallel with the Special 1 change, the opportunity to execute Special 2 change is taken away again.

Figure 95 is a diagram explaining the relationship between the game state and the change time in the embodiment. The target of the change presentation in the non-time-saving game state and the minute time-saving game state, i.e., the actual change target for progressing the game, is the special 1 change. In the non-time-saving game state, the change time is determined based on the number of special 1 changes since the non-time-saving game state was set and the number of special 1 reserved. Specifically, after the non-time-saving game state is set, the change time is determined to be 1 second for the first and second special 1 changes, regardless of the number of special 1 reserved.

In addition, after the non-time-saving play state is set, for the third and subsequent special 1 fluctuations, a different fluctuation time is determined depending on the number of special 1 reserved. Specifically, if the number of special 1 reserved is 0 or 1, a fluctuation time of 12 seconds or more is determined, if the number of special 1 reserved is 2, a fluctuation time of 8 seconds or more is determined, and if the number of special 1 reserved is 3, a fluctuation time of 4 seconds or more is determined. In other words, the shortest fluctuation time for the third and subsequent special 1 fluctuations in the non-time-saving play state is 12 seconds when the number of special 1 reserved is 0 or 1, 8 seconds when the number of special 1 reserved is 2, and 4 seconds when the number of special 1 reserved is 3.

In addition, in the micro-time-saving game state, the shortest change time is determined for each number of reserved special 1s, regardless of the number of times the special 1 changes. The shortest change time for each number of reserved special 1s in the micro-time-saving game state is the same as the shortest change time for each number of reserved special 1s for the third or subsequent special 1 changes in the non-time-saving game state. In this embodiment, in the non-time-saving game state and the micro-time-saving game state, the more reserved special 1s there are, the shorter the shortest change time is.

In addition, in the non-time-saving play state and the micro-time-saving play state, the fluctuation time for special 2 fluctuation is set to 5 seconds, and the fluctuation time for normal fluctuation is set to 30 seconds.

On the other hand, the actual fluctuation object in the time-saving play state A, time-saving play state B, and time-saving play state C is the normal map fluctuation. Here, the shortest fluctuation time of the normal map fluctuation, which is the actual fluctuation object, is the same in the time-saving play state A, time-saving play state B, and time-saving play state C, but the shortest fluctuation time may be different in each advantageous state.

In each favorable state, from the first regular map change to the regular map change before the final regular map change, the minimum change time is determined for each reserved regular map number. Here, if the reserved regular map number is 0 or 1, the minimum change time for regular map change is set to 6 seconds, if the reserved regular map number is 2, the minimum change time for regular map change is set to 4 seconds, and if the reserved regular map number is 3, the minimum change time for regular map change is set to 2 seconds. In contrast, for the final regular map change, the change time is determined to be 10 seconds, regardless of the reserved regular map number. In addition, in favorable states, the change time for special 1 change is set to 1 second, and the change time for special 2 change is set to 5 seconds.

Figure 96 is a time chart of the final fluctuation of an advantageous state in an embodiment. As shown in (a) of Figure 96, assume that the final normal map fluctuation is started in an advantageous state. In this case, as shown in (c) of Figure 96, the game state transitions to a non-time-saving game state at the start of the final normal map fluctuation. In other words, during the final normal map fluctuation, the game state is already set to a non-time-saving game state. Then, if the long opening of the second start hole 122 is won during the final normal map fluctuation, the second start hole 122 is opened for 2.9 seconds x 2 times, as shown in (b) of Figure 96.

If, for example, a game ball enters the first starting hole 120 during the final normal pattern change, a special 1 change will start, as shown in FIG. 96(d). At the start of this special 1 change, the game state is set to a non-time-saving game state, but in this embodiment, the change time of the first special 1 change in the non-time-saving game state is always set to 1 second. Therefore, the special 1 change that starts during the final normal pattern change will end at the latest within the time it takes for the normal pattern to be determined (5 seconds).

In this embodiment, the fluctuation time (1 second) of the first and second special 1 fluctuations in the non-time-saving game state is shorter than the time from the start to the end of the auxiliary game (from the opening to the ending), and is also shorter than the time from the start to the end of the long opening of the second start port 122. Therefore, even if the special 1 fluctuation is started immediately before the second start port 122 starts to open, the second start port 122 remains open until the fixed time of the special 1 fluctuation has elapsed.

As a result, even if two special 1 variations are executed between the start of the final regular variation and the start of the long opening of the second starting port 122, the player can still get an opportunity to execute a special 2 variation.

As described above, according to this embodiment, a game board 108 is provided with a game area 116 in which starting holes including a first starting hole 120 and an openable/closable second starting hole 122 are provided, and when a predetermined condition is met, an auxiliary game (long opening) is executed in which the second starting hole 122 is controlled to open and close in a specific manner that allows a game ball to enter.

Based on the entry of the game ball into the starting hole, one of a number of types of patterns (special patterns) including a predetermined winning pattern (small winning pattern) is determined, a change time until the pattern is displayed on the pattern display unit (first special pattern display unit 160, second special pattern display unit 162) is determined, a process of timing the change time and, when the change time has elapsed, a change process including a process of displaying the pattern on the pattern display unit is executed, and based on the predetermined winning pattern being displayed on the pattern display unit, the opening and closing of the large prize opening provided in the game area is controlled to execute a first large prize opening opening and closing game (small prize game), and based on the game ball that entered the large prize opening entering a predetermined specific area (specific area 140b) during the first large prize opening and closing game, the opening and closing of the large prize opening is controlled to execute a second large prize opening opening and closing game (big prize game).

In addition, one of a number of states is set, including a first state (normal state) and a second state (advantageous state) in which auxiliary play is easier to execute than in the first state, and when a preset state change condition (time-saving end condition) is met in the second state, the state is changed to the first state.

In addition, after changing from the second state to the first state, the second starting hole 122 may be controlled to open and close in a specific manner. In addition, it is possible to select and execute either a change process (special change 1) that is executed based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 120, or a change process (special change 2) that is executed based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 122.

After the state is changed from the second state to the first state, if a pattern is determined based on a game ball entering the first starting hole 120 during a specified period in which the number of times a pattern is determined is within a specified number (2 times), a time shorter than the time from the start to the end of the auxiliary game in which the second starting hole 122 is controlled to open and close in a specific manner can be determined as the variable time.

With the above configuration, this embodiment can reduce the risk of a situation occurring in which, if the long opening of the second starting hole 122 is won in the final normal variation, the special 1 variation is executed, making it impossible to execute the special 2 variation. In addition, since the variation time for the special 1 variation is set to 1 second during an advantageous state, even if the special 1 variation is initiated when the long opening of the second starting hole 122 is won during an advantageous state, the risk of the special 2 variation becoming impossible to execute is reduced, as described above. As described above, this embodiment ensures the opportunity to execute the special 2 variation, and reduces the risk of a disadvantage to the player.

When the advantageous state ends, a result display is executed that suggests and notifies the player of the game results from the first win to the end of the winning streak.

Figure 97 is a diagram illustrating an example of a result presentation according to an embodiment. In the time-saving game state, if a jackpot (including a type 2 jackpot) is not won within the range of the number of normal map fluctuations set as the time-saving end condition, the game state transitions to a non-time-saving game state at the start of the final normal map fluctuation, as described above. In this case, even if the game state has changed, a fluctuation presentation targeting the normal map fluctuation is executed during the final normal map fluctuation.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 97(a), when the normal pattern starts to change, the remaining number of times the normal pattern will change is displayed as 0, and the effect patterns 210a, 210b, 210c, and the second mini pattern 221 start to change. After that, when the normal pattern is displayed as stopped on the normal pattern display 168, as shown in FIG. 97(b), the effect patterns 210a, 210b, and 210c are displayed as stopped in a losing pattern, and the second mini pattern 221 is displayed as stopped.

At this time, if the game is played properly, the special 1 reserve will not be stored, and the game will transition to a customer waiting state (a waiting state for both customers described later) with the end of the normal game change. In the customer waiting state (a waiting state for both customers described later), a result presentation is executed as shown in FIG. 97(c). The result presentation is to inform the player of the game results in the consecutive win state, and here, along with a display that the current presentation mode is ending (in the figure, XX is the name of the presentation mode to end), the number of jackpots in the consecutive win state (in the figure, BONUS x 5 times), the number of 10R big role games in the consecutive win state (in the figure, BIG x 4 times), the number of 3R big role games (in the figure, REG x 1 time), and the total number of prize balls acquired in the consecutive win state (in the figure, TOTAL: 6250) are displayed as game results. In other words, in the result presentation, a result display screen based on the game results during a specified period (consecutive wins) is displayed.

In addition, in the result presentation, when the game result is displayed for a predetermined period of time, a left-hit suggestion image is displayed, suggesting a left hit, as shown in FIG. 97(d). Along with the display of this left-hit suggestion image, a sound such as "Please hit with your left hand" is output during the result presentation.

The above result presentation has a presentation end condition, and when the presentation end condition is met, the result presentation ends and the presentation mode transitions to a chance mode corresponding to the non-time-saving game state. Here, the presentation end conditions for the result presentation are two conditions: 30 seconds have passed since the start of the result presentation, and a special 1 change has been executed. When either of these two conditions is met, a background image for the chance mode is displayed on the main presentation display section 200a. For example, when a special 1 change has been executed, a background image for the chance mode is displayed and a change presentation targeting the special 1 change is started, as shown in FIG. 97(e).

Figure 98 is a time chart of the result presentation in the embodiment. As shown in (a) of Figure 98, when the final normal map change is executed in an advantageous state, a change presentation (normal map change presentation) targeting the normal map change is executed, as shown in (f) of Figure 98. At this time, the game state is set to a non-time-saving game state, as shown in (d) of Figure 98. However, during the final normal map change, as shown in (e) of Figure 98, the presentation mode before the start of the final normal map change, that is, the presentation mode corresponding to the advantageous state, is maintained.

If the result of the final normal variation is a short opening of the second starting hole 122, the second starting hole 122 is opened for 0.05 seconds, as shown in FIG. 98 (b). As mentioned above, a game ball cannot enter the second starting hole 122 while it is short open. Also, when the fixed time has elapsed during the final normal variation, the result display starts, as shown in FIG. 98 (g).

When the game ball enters the first starting hole 120 during the result presentation, as shown in (c) of FIG. 98, a special 1 variation is executed. At this time, the variation time of the special 1 variation is 1 second, as described above. When the special 1 variation is executed, as shown in (g) of FIG. 98, the result presentation ends at that point, and as shown in (e) of FIG. 98, the presentation mode transitions to chance mode. Also, as shown in (h) of FIG. 98, with the start of the special 1 variation, a variation presentation (special chart variation presentation) targeting the special 1 variation is executed.

Here, the special 1 change starts during the result presentation, and the result presentation ends with the start of the special 1 change. If the special 1 change does not start during the result presentation, the result presentation ends 30 seconds after it started, as shown by the dashed line in (g) of Figure 98. In other words, the result presentation is executed for a maximum of 30 seconds, but by executing the special 1 change, the execution time is shortened.

With the above configuration, for example, a player who wants to take their time to check the result presentation or take a photo can stop firing the game ball to continue the result presentation for 30 seconds. On the other hand, a player who wants to end the result presentation can shorten the result presentation and resume playing by firing the game ball.

In this way, according to this embodiment, the result presentation can reliably inform the player of changes in the game state, i.e., changes in the firing operation, and the result presentation can be shortened by the player's operation. This makes it possible for the player to resume playing early while reducing the possibility of a disadvantage being incurred due to a wrong operation, thereby increasing the player's desire to continue playing.

Here, we have described a case in which the conditions for ending the result presentation are that 30 seconds have passed and that a special 1 change has been executed. However, the conditions for ending the result presentation are not limited to this. For example, the result presentation may end when presentation button 208 is operated. In any case, the result presentation may be shortened when a preset presentation end condition is met, and the conditions for ending the presentation are not particularly limited.

As mentioned above, the advantageous state has three conditions for ending the time-saving mode: the number of special 2 time-saving times, the total number of time-saving times, and the number of regular pattern changes. The number of regular pattern changes is a time-saving mode ending condition that is met when the game is being played properly, and when the game is being played properly, the result display will be executed after the final regular pattern change, as described above. On the other hand, irregular situations may occur in an advantageous state, such as the number of special 2 time-saving times or the total number of time-saving times reaching a specified number. If the advantageous state ends due to the occurrence of an irregular situation, the display will be executed as follows.

Figure 99 is a diagram illustrating an example of a state change suggestion effect according to an embodiment. For example, as shown in Figure 99 (a), assume that a normal pattern change effect is being executed during an advantageous state. In this state, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 120, a special 1 change is executed. Assume that the total number of time-saving times reaches 10 due to the special 1 change executed at this time. When the total number of time-saving times reaches 10 in an advantageous state, when the special pattern is confirmed, it is determined that the time-saving end condition is met, and the game state is set to a non-time-saving game state.

In this case, a state change suggestion effect is executed with the start of the tenth pattern change display in an advantageous state. In the state change suggestion effect, a shutter image 250 is displayed as shown in FIG. 99(b). As shown in FIG. 99(b) and (c), the shutter image 250 is divided into two in the width direction of the main effect display section 200a, and is displayed moving closer to each other from both the left and right sides toward the center in the width direction.

The main performance display section 200a is constructed by stacking multiple layers on which images are displayed. A priority is set for each layer, and when an image is simultaneously displayed on both a relatively high priority layer and a relatively low priority layer, in the range where the display areas of the images overlap, the image displayed on the high priority layer is displayed visibly on the main performance display section 200a.

The background image provided for each performance mode is displayed on the first layer, which has the lowest priority, and the performance patterns 210a, 210b, and 210c are displayed on the second layer, which has a higher priority than the first layer. The shutter image 250 is then displayed on the third layer, which has a higher priority than the second layer. Therefore, when a state change suggestion performance is executed, the shutter image 250 is displayed in front of the performance patterns 210a, 210b, and 210c, and the performance patterns 210a, 210b, and 210c and the background image become invisible.

The first mini-pattern 220 and the second mini-pattern 221 are also displayed in a fourth layer, which has a higher priority than the third layer in which the shutter image 250 is displayed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 99(c), even when the shutter image 250 is displayed, the player can grasp the execution status of the special pattern change and the regular pattern change from the first mini-pattern 220 and the second mini-pattern 221.

The above state change suggestion effect continues until the special 1 change ends. Therefore, if the normal pattern change ends during the special 1 change, the second mini pattern 221 is displayed as still as shown in FIG. 99(c), but the first mini pattern 220 continues to change and the shutter image 250 continues to be displayed during this time.

When the special symbol is displayed frozen on the first special symbol display 160, the first mini symbol 220 is displayed frozen, as shown in FIG. 99(d). After that, when the fixed time has elapsed, the machine enters a customer waiting state (a waiting state for both customers, described below), and the result presentation begins, as shown in FIG. 99(e).

Figure 100 is a time chart of the result presentation during an irregular event in the embodiment. As shown in (a) of Figure 100, it is assumed that a normal pattern change is being executed. In this normal pattern change, if the short opening of the second starting hole 122 is won, as shown in (b) of Figure 100, after the normal pattern is stopped and displayed on the normal pattern display 168, the second starting hole 122 is short opened.

As shown in FIG. 100(c), when a game ball enters the first starting hole 120 during normal game play, a special 1 game play is executed. If this special 1 game play is the 10th special 1 game play in an advantageous game play, the game play state transitions from the advantageous game play state to a non-time-saving game play state when the fixed time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 100(d).

As shown in (e) of Figure 100, during the normal map change, the normal map change presentation is executed, but with the start of the special 1 change, the normal map change presentation ends and the status change suggestion presentation starts, as shown in (f) of Figure 100. The status change suggestion presentation continues until the confirmation time for the special 1 change has elapsed. Then, as the confirmation time elapses and the machine transitions to a customer waiting state (a state where both customers are waiting, as described below), the result presentation is executed, as shown in (g) of Figure 100.

Here, a common result presentation is executed when an irregular event occurs, such as when the total number of time-saving times reaches 10, and the advantageous state ends, and when the number of normal changes reaches a specified number, and the advantageous state ends. In other words, in this embodiment, there are multiple conditions for the advantageous state to end, that is, multiple time-saving end conditions, and the same result presentation is executed regardless of which of the time-saving end conditions is met.

The conditions for ending the result presentation are the same regardless of the time-saving ending conditions that have been met. Therefore, even in the case shown in FIG. 100, when 30 seconds have passed since the start of the result presentation or when a special 1 change is executed, the result presentation ends and the background image for the chance mode is displayed on the main presentation display section 200a. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 100 (h), when a special 1 change is executed during the result presentation, the background image for the chance mode is displayed and a special chart change presentation targeting the special 1 change is started.

Note that here, the same result presentation is executed when the number of normal changes reaches a specified number, and when the total number of time-saving times reaches a specified number. However, some of the result presentation may differ depending on the time-saving end conditions that are met. Also, the content of the result presentation is not limited to the above, and can be designed and modified as appropriate.

In addition, here, regardless of the time-saving end condition that has been met, the result presentation ends when a special 1 variation is executed or 30 seconds have passed since the start of the result presentation. However, the condition for ending the result presentation may differ depending on the time-saving end condition that has been met.

In any case, the gaming machine allows gameplay to proceed in one of a number of states, including a first state (normal state) and a second state (advantageous state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first state, and allows gameplay to proceed according to progression conditions set for each state. When a first end condition (the number of normal changes reaches a specified number) that is set in advance in the second state, or a second end condition (the total number of time-saving turns reaches a specified number) that is different from the first end condition, is established, the second state is ended, and upon the end of the second state, a specified presentation (result presentation) is executed in which a result display screen based on the game results during a specified period (consecutive wins) is displayed.

The result display screen is at least partially the same when the first end condition is met and when the second end condition is met. That is, the result presentation is at least partially the same when the first end condition is met and when the second end condition is met. Furthermore, the display time is shortened when a preset display end condition (start of Special 1 change) is met. That is, the presentation time of the result presentation is shortened when a preset end condition (start of Special 1 change) is met. The display end conditions may include a display end condition (start of Special 1 change, 30 seconds have passed) that is common between when the first end condition is met and when the second end condition is met.

Note that here, the completely same display end conditions are set for when the first end condition is met and when the second end condition is met, but it is sufficient that at least some of the display end conditions are common. In this way, by making at least some of the display end conditions common, even if an irregular situation occurs and a result presentation is executed, it becomes easier for the player to resume playing, and a decrease in motivation to continue playing can be suppressed.

As described above, in this embodiment, the occurrence of an irregular event may cause a transition from an advantageous state to a normal state, but conversely, the occurrence of an irregular event may also cause a transition from a normal state to an advantageous state.

Figure 101 is a diagram illustrating an example of a state change suggestion effect during an irregularity according to an embodiment. As shown in Figure 101 (a), assume that a special 1 change is started while the final regular pattern change is being executed. At this time, although the game state has shifted from an advantageous state to a normal state at the start of the final regular pattern change, the target of the change effect is set to the regular pattern change during the final regular pattern change. Therefore, if the total number of time-saving times has not reached the specified number of times and the result of the big role lottery for the special 1 change is a miss, only the change display and stop display of the first mini pattern 220 are performed, and the special pattern change effect is not executed.

Here, in the advantageous state, even if a specific miss occurs, the game state will not change. However, during the final regular pattern change, the game state is set to the non-time-saving game state. Therefore, if a special 1 change is executed during the final regular pattern change and special pattern Xa is won, the game state will be set to the C time-saving game state after the special pattern is determined.

In this case, as shown in Fig. 101(b) and (c), when the special 1 variation starts, a status change suggestion effect is executed and a shutter image 250 is displayed. The status change suggestion effect executed at this time is the same as the effect executed when an irregular situation occurs and the advantageous state ends, as shown in Fig. 99.

When the special symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display 160, the first mini symbol 220 is displayed as shown in FIG. 101(d). After that, when the fixed time has elapsed, the game is set to the C time-saving game state again, and the right-hit notification effect is executed in conjunction with the change in game state.

Figure 102 is a time chart of the state change suggestion effect during an irregular event according to the embodiment. As shown in Figure 102 (a), it is assumed that the final normal map change is executed in an advantageous state. Also, it is assumed that during this final normal map change, the short opening of the second starting hole 122 is won, as shown in Figure 102 (b). In this case, as shown in Figure 102 (d), with the start of the final normal map change, the game state transitions from an advantageous state to a non-time-saving game state.

During the final normal map change, as shown in FIG. 102(e), the mode is set to a presentation mode corresponding to an advantageous state, and as shown in FIG. 102(f), the normal map change presentation is executed with the start of the final normal map change. Under such circumstances, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 120 during the final normal map change, as shown in FIG. 102(c), the special 1 change is started.

At this time, if a specific miss occurs during the special 1 variation and the special pattern Xa is determined, the game state is set to a favorable state (C time-saving game state) again when the set time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 102 (d). In this case, as shown in FIG. 102 (g), a state change suggestion effect is executed with the start of the special 1 variation. With the start of the state change suggestion effect, the normal pattern variation effect is interrupted, as shown in FIG. 102 (f).

After that, as shown in FIG. 102(a), when the first normal map change is executed after the favorable state is reset, the status change suggestion display ends with the start of the normal map change as shown in FIG. 102(g). At this time, as shown in FIG. 102(e), the display mode becomes C mode, and as shown in FIG. 102(f), the normal map change display is executed. Note that, although the status change suggestion display ends with the start of the normal map change display here, the status change suggestion display may end, for example, when a predetermined time has passed.

According to this embodiment, after the non-time-saving game state is set, the time for the first and second Special 1 fluctuations is determined to be 1 second, as described above. Then, after the non-time-saving game state is set, if the special symbol Xa is won in the first and second Special 1 fluctuations, a state change suggestion effect is executed, as described above.

In other words, in Figures 101 and 102, a case where a special 1 change is executed during a final regular pattern change is described as an example of a case where a state change suggestion effect is executed. However, if a special 1 change is executed after the final regular pattern change has ended, as described above, a result effect is executed in the customer waiting state (a state where both customers are waiting, described below), and when the special 1 change starts, the result effect ends and the special pattern change effect starts.

At this time, if the special symbol Xa is won in the first or second special 1 variation in the non-time-saving play state, a state change suggestion effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 101. On the other hand, if the special symbol Xa is won in the third or subsequent special 1 variation in the non-time-saving play state, a special variation effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 90.

As described above, according to this embodiment, the game progresses in one of a number of states, including a first state (non-time-saving game state), a second state (slightly time-saving game state) different from the first state, and a third state (C time-saving game state) in which it is easier for the game ball to enter the starting area (second starting hole 122) provided in the game area 116 than in the first and second states.

In addition, based on the entry of the game ball into the starting area, one of a number of types of patterns (special patterns) including a winning pattern (big win pattern, small win pattern), a first specific pattern (special pattern Xb), and a second specific pattern (special pattern Xa) is determined, and based on the determination of the winning pattern, the big prize opening provided in the game area 116 is controlled to open and close to execute a big prize opening opening and closing game (big prize game, small prize game), and the state is changed according to the preset state change conditions to execute the performance during the game.

In addition, the state can be changed to a second state based on the determination of a first specific symbol in the first state, the state can be changed to a third state based on the determination of a second specific symbol in the first state, the state is not changed based on the determination of the first or second specific symbol in the second state, and the state can be changed to the first state in the third state based on the establishment of a predetermined state change condition (time-saving escape).

After the first state is set, different effects (special variation effect, state change suggestion effect) are executed depending on whether the second specific pattern is determined during a specified period during which the number of pattern determinations is within a specified number (1 time) or after the specified period has elapsed.

Furthermore, a common effect (effect for C mode) is executed during the third state and during a specified period, and if a second specific symbol is determined during the specified period, the common effect is interrupted and a specific effect (effect suggesting a state change) is executed.

With the above configuration, even when transitioning to the same C time-saving game state, effects are executed according to the game situation, so it is possible to reliably inform the player of the change in game state, reducing the risk of causing a disadvantage to the player.

Here, in the micro-time-saving game state, even if a game ball passes through the gate 124, the second start port 122 is never long-opened, but always short-opened. In the short-opening of the second start port 122, the second start port 122 is only open for 0.05 seconds, so basically, a game ball will not enter the second start port 122 while it is short-opened. However, if an unforeseen incident occurs, such as a game ball getting stuck in the second start port 122, there is a risk that a game ball will enter the second start port 122 while it is short-opened.

If, for example, a game ball enters the second starting hole 122 during the short time play state, a lottery for a big prize may be held based on the special 2 reservation. If an irregular event occurs, such as a big win being won through this lottery, the game state will transition from the short time play state to a favorable state. In the favorable state, a right hit is required, but if the player does not realize that the state has transitioned to the favorable state, the player may continue to hit left, which may cause a disadvantage to the player. Therefore, in this embodiment, even if an irregular event occurs during the short time play state, a state change suggestion effect similar to that described above is executed.

Figure 103 is a diagram for explaining an example of an irregular presentation in the micro-time-saving game state according to the embodiment. As shown in Figure 103 (a), in the micro-time-saving game state, a special pattern change presentation for the special 1 change is executed. However, for example, if the game ball does not enter the first starting hole 120 and the special 1 change is not executed, the game moves to a customer waiting state (a state waiting for both customers described later). When the special 2 change is executed in the customer waiting state (a state waiting for both customers described later), the first mini pattern 220 is displayed in a changing manner as shown in Figure 103 (b). In the big role lottery related to the special 2 change, a big win or a small win is always won, so in this case, as shown in Figure 103 (b), a state change suggestion presentation is executed with the start of the special 2 change. The state change suggestion presentation executed at this time is the same presentation as when other irregular events occur and the game state is changed.

When the special symbol is displayed on the second special symbol display 162, the first mini symbol 220 is displayed as stopped, and a right-hit notification effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 103(c). In this way, the state change suggestion effect is executed not only when the game state is changed, but also when an irregular event occurs and a big role game or a small win game is executed. FIG. 103 shows an example of an effect when an irregular event occurs in a normal state and a big role game or a small win game is executed, but even in an advantageous state, a big role game or a small win game may be executed due to the occurrence of an irregular event.

Figure 104 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect when an irregularity occurs in an advantageous state according to the embodiment. As shown in Figure 104 (a), in an advantageous state, a normal map change is being executed, and a normal map change effect is being executed during the normal map change. In this state, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 120, a special 1 change is executed, and a big role lottery based on the special 1 reservation is held. If a big win is won in this big role lottery, a state change suggestion effect is executed, and a shutter image 250 is displayed on the main effect display unit 200a, as shown in Figures 104 (b) and (c). The state change suggestion effect executed at this time is the same as the effect executed when the other irregular events described above occur.

This state change suggestion effect continues even after the normal pattern change has ended, until the special 1 pattern change has ended. Therefore, for example, when the normal pattern change ends during the special 1 pattern change, as shown in FIG. 104(c), the first mini pattern 220 is displayed changing and the second mini pattern 221 is displayed stationary, superimposed on the shutter image 250. Then, when the special pattern (jackpot pattern) is displayed stationary on the first special pattern display 160, the first mini pattern 220 is displayed stationary, and the right-hit notification effect begins, as shown in FIG. 104(d).

As described above, according to this embodiment, the game progresses in one of a number of states including a predetermined state (advantageous state) in which the game progresses when the starting condition is met (start of normal variation). The game progress is controlled based on the state being set, and when a first irregular condition that is set in advance is met in the predetermined state (a big win is won with special 1 variation), and when a second irregular condition different from the first irregular condition is met (the number of special 2 time reductions or the total number of time reductions reaches a specified number), the predetermined state is transitioned to another state (big role game, non-time reduction game state). At this time, when the first irregular condition is met in the predetermined state, and when the second irregular condition is met in the predetermined state, a common effect (state change suggestion effect) that is set in advance is executed.

In this way, a common presentation is executed when an irregular event occurs and changes the game state, and when an irregular event occurs and a big win game is executed, so that the player can easily notice that a change in the firing operation, etc. is required, thereby reducing the risk of the player suffering a disadvantage.

In addition, in this embodiment, the state change suggestion effect can be executed even if the power is turned back on after a power outage occurs during play.

Figure 105 is a diagram illustrating an example of the presentation when the power is turned off and then turned back on during the micro-time-saving game state according to the embodiment. As shown in Figure 105 (a), in the micro-time-saving game state, a special 1 variation is being executed, and a special chart variation presentation is being executed. In this state, a power outage occurs, and the power is turned back on. As described above, when the power is turned back on, the sub-command group set process (see Figure 77) is executed in the main control board 300, and various commands are sent from the main control board 300 to the sub-control board 330.

If a power outage occurs while the first special symbol display 160 or the second special symbol display 162 is displaying a changing or stopped symbol, a special symbol confirmation command indicating the type of special symbol determined before the power outage is sent to the sub-control board 330 (S110-23). At this time, if a special symbol confirmation command indicating a jackpot symbol is received, a state change suggestion effect is executed as shown in FIG. 105(b). In this case, when a special symbol is displayed as a stopped symbol on the first special symbol display 160 or the second special symbol display 162, a right hit notification effect is executed as shown in FIG. 105(c).

On the other hand, when a special symbol confirmation command indicating a losing symbol is received, the message "Power outage recovery, please wait" is displayed on the main effect display unit 200a as shown in FIG. 105(d). In this case, when a special symbol is displayed as a stopped symbol on the first special symbol display 160, the effect symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c are displayed as a stopped losing pattern as shown in FIG. 105(e).

Figure 106 is a diagram illustrating an example of a presentation when the power is turned off and then turned back on during an advantageous state in the embodiment. As shown in Figure 106 (a), in an advantageous state, a normal map change is being executed, and a normal map change presentation is being executed. In this state, a power cut occurs and the power is turned back on. As described above, when the power is turned back on, various commands are sent from the main control board 300 to the sub-control board 330. However, in this embodiment, when the power is turned on, commands related to special play are sent, but commands related to normal play are not sent.

Therefore, if the power is cut off and then turned back on while in a favorable state, as shown in FIG. 106(b), the message "Power outage recovery, please wait" is displayed on the main performance display unit 200a. At this time, the sub-control board 330 cannot distinguish whether the normal pattern is changing or not, so the second mini pattern 221 is displayed as stopped.

In this state, if the special 1 variation is started and a jackpot is won, a state change suggestion effect is executed as shown in FIG. 106(c). After that, when the special symbol is displayed as a stopped symbol on the first special symbol display 160, a right-hit notification effect is executed as shown in FIG. 106(d).

As described above, in this embodiment, the status change suggestion effect can be executed even if a power outage occurs. As described above, the status change suggestion effect is executed in various situations where an irregular event occurs and the status changes. Therefore, by executing the status change suggestion effect when the power is turned back on after an unexpected power outage occurs, it becomes easier for the player to understand what operations they should perform next, and the risk of the player suffering a disadvantage can be reduced.

Figure 107 is a diagram illustrating another example of the presentation when the power is cut off and then turned back on during an advantageous state in the embodiment. As shown in Figure 107(a), assume that a power cut occurs when a normal map change is being executed in an advantageous state and a normal map change presentation is being executed. In this case, when the power is turned back on, the message "Power cut is being restored. Please wait a moment" is displayed on the main presentation display unit 200a as shown in Figure 107(b).

Now, let us assume that in the normal map variation that was started before the power outage, a long opening of the second starting hole 122 was won. In this case, when the normal map variation ends, an auxiliary game begins in which the second starting hole 122 is long opened. At this time, with the start of the auxiliary game, a normal power opening designation command (Figure 87) is sent from the main control board 300 to the sub-control board 330. This normal power opening designation command is configured to be able to distinguish whether the second starting hole 122 is to be short opened or long opened.

When a normal power release command indicating a long opening of the second starting hole 122 is received, the sub-control board 330 executes an operation instruction display as shown in FIG. 107(c). The operation instruction display executed at this time is the same as the display executed when the long opening of the second starting hole 122 is won in an advantageous state without a power interruption.

In addition, in this embodiment, three customer waiting states are provided on the sub-control board 330: a special customer waiting state, a regular customer waiting state, and a double customer waiting state.

As described above, in the embodiment, when the main control board 300 determines that the number of special 1 reserves and special 2 reserves stored is 0 during the special symbol change waiting process, a customer waiting designation command is sent to the sub-control board 330. When the sub-control board 330 receives the customer waiting designation command, it sets the special symbol customer waiting state. Note that when the special symbol customer waiting state is set, if the sub-control board 330 receives a change command, the special symbol customer waiting state is released.

As described above, in the embodiment, when the normal symbol change waiting process in the main control board 300 determines that the number of reserved normal symbols is zero, a normal symbol customer waiting designation command is sent to the sub-control board 330. When the sub-control board 330 receives the normal symbol customer waiting designation command, it sets the normal symbol customer waiting state. Note that when the normal symbol customer waiting state is set, if the sub-control board 330 receives a normal symbol change pattern command, the normal symbol customer waiting state is released.

When both the special chart customer waiting state and the regular chart customer waiting state are set, the sub-control board 330 sets the waiting state for both customers. When the waiting state for both customers is set, the waiting state for both customers is released when the sub-control board 330 receives either a change command that is an actual change target or a regular chart change pattern command that is an actual change target. On the other hand, in the embodiment, when the waiting state for both customers is set, even if the sub-control board 330 receives a change command that is not an actual change target or a regular chart change pattern command that is not an actual change target, the waiting state for both customers is not released.

Figure 108 is the first diagram explaining the demo performance according to the embodiment. As described above, since the actual change target in the non-time-saving play state and the minute-time-saving play state is the special 1 change, as shown in Figure 108 (a), the main performance display unit 200a executes a special pattern change performance targeting the special 1 change. At this time, if the game is being played properly, the second mini pattern 221 is displayed as stopped because no regular pattern reserve is stored. Then, with the end of the special 1 change, the performance patterns 210a, 210b, 210c, and the first mini pattern 220 are displayed as stopped, and the state transitions to a waiting state for both customers.

If a predetermined demo performance start time (e.g., 60 seconds) has elapsed since the waiting state for both customers was set without the waiting state for both customers being released, the execution of a demo performance in which a dedicated demo movie is played will start on the main performance display section 200a, as shown in FIG. 108(b).

As described above, in the embodiment, when the waiting state for both customers is set, if the sub-control board 330 receives either a fluctuation command that is an actual fluctuation target or a general map fluctuation pattern command that is an actual fluctuation target, the waiting state for both customers is released. On the other hand, when the waiting state for both customers is set, even if the sub-control board 330 receives a fluctuation command that is not an actual fluctuation target or a general map fluctuation pattern command that is not an actual fluctuation target, the waiting state for both customers is not released.

Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 108(b), when the actual change target is a special 1 change, the waiting state for both customers is set, and a demo movie is being played, if a regular pattern change pattern command is received, as shown in FIG. 108(c), the display of the change in the second mini pattern 221 will start, but the waiting state for both customers will not be released and the demo movie will continue to play.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 108(b), when the actual change target is Special 1 change, the waiting state for both customers is set, and a change pattern command is received while a demo movie is being played, as shown in FIG. 108(d), the waiting state for both customers is released, the playback of the demo movie ends, and the display of changes in the performance patterns 210a, 210b, 210c, and the first mini pattern 220 begins.

Figure 109 is the second diagram explaining the demo performance according to the embodiment. As described above, in the A time-saving play state, the B time-saving play state, and the C time-saving play state, the actual change target is the normal map change, so as shown in Figure 109 (a), a normal map change performance targeting the normal map change is executed. At this time, if a special map change is not being performed, the first mini pattern 220 is displayed as still. Then, with the end of the normal map change, the performance patterns 210a, 210b, 210c, and the second mini pattern 221 are displayed as still, and the state transitions to a waiting state for both customers.

Then, if a predetermined demo performance start time (e.g., 60 seconds) has elapsed since the waiting state for both customers was set without the waiting state for both customers being released, the execution of a demo performance in which a dedicated demo movie is played will start on the main performance display section 200a, as shown in FIG. 109(b).

Also, as shown in FIG. 109(b), when the actual change target is a normal pattern change, the waiting state for both customers is set, and a change command is received while a demo movie is being played, the display of the change in the first mini pattern 220 starts as shown in FIG. 109(c), but the waiting state for both customers is not released and the demo movie continues to play.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 109(b), when the actual change target is a normal map change, the waiting state for both customers is set, and a normal map change pattern command is received while a demo movie is being played, as shown in FIG. 109(d), the waiting state for both customers is released, the playback of the demo movie ends, and the display of the changes in the performance patterns 210a, 210b, 210c, and the second mini pattern 221 begins.

As described above, in the embodiment, even if a change command that is not an actual change target or a normal map change pattern command that is not an actual change target is received, the change display of the performance patterns 210a, 210b, and 210c does not start. Therefore, if a change command that is not an actual change target or a normal map change pattern command that is not an actual change target is received during playback of a demo movie and playback of the demo movie is terminated, the change display of the performance patterns 210a, 210b, and 210c does not start even though playback of the demo movie has ended, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

Therefore, in the embodiment, as described above, even if a variation command that is not an actual variation target or a normal pattern variation command that is not an actual variation target is received during playback of the demo movie, playback of the demo movie is not terminated, and the first mini pattern 220 or the second mini pattern 221 is displayed in parallel with the demo movie. This makes it possible to reduce the possibility that the player will feel uncomfortable. Also, since it is necessary to perform an appropriate shot (right or left shot) according to the game status in order to terminate playback of the demo movie, it is also possible to encourage the player to perform the appropriate shot.

Next, we will explain the processing in the sub-control board 330 to execute each of the above-mentioned effects. Note that here, we will mainly explain the processing to execute the effects related to this embodiment, and will not explain other processing.

Figure 110 is a flowchart explaining the sub timer interrupt processing in the sub control board 330 according to the embodiment. The sub timer interrupt processing according to the embodiment is executed in place of the sub timer interrupt processing according to the above reference example.

(Step S1100-1)
The sub CPU 330a saves the registers.

(Step S1100-3)
The sub-CPU 330a performs processing for permitting an interrupt.

(Step S1100-5)
The sub-CPU 330a performs update processing of various timer counters used in the sub-control board 330. Here, unless otherwise specified, the various timer counters are decremented by 1 each time the sub-timer interrupt processing of the sub-control board 330 is performed, and the decrement stops when the counter reaches 0.

(Step S1300)
The sub-CPU 330a analyzes the command stored in the receive buffer of the sub-RAM 330c, and stores information corresponding to the received command.

(Step S1400)
The sub-CPU 330a performs a performance control process for executing various performances based on the information stored in step S1300, i.e., the commands received from the main control board 300. This performance control process will be described later.

(Step S1100-9)
The sub-CPU 330a restores the registers and ends the sub-timer interrupt process.

Figure 111 is a flowchart explaining the performance control process in the sub-control board 330 in the embodiment.

(Step S1410)
The sub-CPU 330a executes a presentation mode control process for setting a presentation mode and executing a presentation corresponding to the currently set presentation mode. This presentation mode control process will be described later.

(Step S1420)
The sub-CPU 330a executes a result presentation control process for executing a result presentation, which will be described later.

(Step S1430)
The sub-CPU 330a executes a state-change suggestion effect control process for executing a state-change suggestion effect. This state-change suggestion effect control process will be described later.

(Step S1440)
The sub-CPU 330a executes a variable performance control process for executing a variable performance. This variable performance control process will be described later.

(Step S1450)
The sub-CPU 330a performs a customer waiting state setting process for setting a special customer waiting flag indicating whether or not a special customer waiting state is set, a regular customer waiting flag indicating whether or not a regular customer waiting state is set, and a two-customer waiting flag indicating whether or not a two-customer waiting state is set. This customer waiting state setting process will be described later. In the embodiment, when the special customer waiting flag is on, the special customer waiting state is set, and when the special customer waiting flag is off, the special customer waiting state is released. Also, when the regular customer waiting flag is on, the regular customer waiting state is set, and when the regular customer waiting flag is off, the regular customer waiting state is released. Also, when the both-customer waiting flag is on, the both-customer waiting state is set, and when the both-customer waiting flag is off, the both-customer waiting state is released.

(Step S1460)
The sub-CPU 330a executes a demo performance control process for executing a demo performance, which will be described later.

Figure 112 is a flowchart explaining the presentation mode control process in the sub-control board 330 in the embodiment.

(Step S1410-1)
The sub-CPU 330a judges whether the condition for changing the presentation mode is satisfied based on the information stored in the command analysis process in the above step S1300. If it is judged that the condition for changing the presentation mode is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1410-3, and if it is judged that the condition for changing the presentation mode is not satisfied, the presentation mode control process is terminated.

The conditions for changing the presentation mode are, for example, when a specified game state change command is received, i.e., when the game state is changed to a specified state. Also, for example, when a special 1 change or a normal change is started after the game state is changed to a specified state, the conditions for changing the presentation mode are set.

(Step S1410-3)
The sub-CPU 330a checks the current game state.

(Step S1410-5)
The sub-CPU 330a sets a presentation mode corresponding to the game state confirmed in step S1410-3.

(Step S1410-7)
The sub-CPU 330a starts displaying a background image corresponding to the presentation mode set in step S1410-5 and playing BGM, and ends the presentation mode control process.

Figure 113 is a flowchart explaining the result presentation control process in the sub-control board 330 in the embodiment.

(Step S1420-1)
The sub-CPU 330a judges whether the final general map change is over. If it is judged that the final general map change is over, the process proceeds to step S1420-3. If it is judged that the final general map change is not over, the process proceeds to step S1420-9.

(Step S1420-3)
The sub-CPU 330a judges whether the short opening of the second starting hole 122 has been won in the final normal variation. If it is judged that the short opening of the second starting hole 122 has been won, the process proceeds to step S1420-5. If it is judged that the short opening of the second starting hole 122 has not been won (the long opening has been won), the process proceeds to step S1420-9.

(Step S1420-5)
The sub-CPU 330a acquires the game results during the consecutive games.

(Step S1420-7)
The sub-CPU 330a executes a result presentation based on the game result acquired in step S1420-5, and ends the result presentation control process.

(Step S1420-9)
The sub-CPU 330a judges whether or not the player is in an advantageous state. If it is judged that the player is in an advantageous state, the process proceeds to step S1420-11, and if it is judged that the player is not in an advantageous state, the process proceeds to step S1420-15.

(Step S1420-11)
The sub-CPU 330a judges whether it is the end of the special 1 variation. If it is judged that it is the end of the special 1 variation, the process proceeds to step S1420-13, and if it is judged that it is not the end of the special 1 variation, the process proceeds to step S1420-15.

(Step S1420-13)
The sub-CPU 330a judges whether the time-saving end condition is satisfied. Here, it is judged that the time-saving end condition is satisfied when the total number of time-saving times reaches 10 due to the end of the special 1 fluctuation in the advantageous state and the advantageous state transitions to the normal state. If it is judged that the time-saving end condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1420-5, and if it is judged that the time-saving end condition is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1420-15.

As a result, if the total number of time-saving plays reaches a set number during an advantageous state and the game transitions to a non-time-saving play state, a result display will be executed.

(Step S1420-15)
The sub-CPU 330a judges whether the result performance end condition is satisfied. In this case, the result performance end condition is preset to be that 30 seconds have passed since the start of the result performance and that the special 1 variation has started during the result performance. If it is determined that the result performance end condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1420-17, and if it is determined that the result performance end condition is not satisfied, the result performance control process is terminated.

(Step S1420-17)
The sub-CPU 330a executes a result presentation end process to end the result presentation, and ends the result presentation control process.

Figure 114 is a flowchart explaining the state change suggestion display control process in the sub-control board 330 in the embodiment.

(Step S1430-1)
The sub-CPU 330a judges whether or not the player is currently in an advantageous state. If it is judged that the player is currently in an advantageous state, the process proceeds to step S1430-3. If it is judged that the player is not currently in an advantageous state, the process proceeds to step S1430-9.

(Step S1430-3)
The sub-CPU 330a judges whether it is the start of the special 1 fluctuation. If it is judged that it is the start of the special 1 fluctuation, the process proceeds to step S1430-5, and if it is judged that it is not the start of the special 1 fluctuation, the process proceeds to step S1430-17.

(Step S1430-5)
The sub-CPU 330a judges whether a jackpot has been won. If it is judged that a jackpot has been won, the process proceeds to step S1430-27, and if it is judged that a jackpot has not been won, the process proceeds to step S1430-7.

(Step S1430-7)
The sub-CPU 330a judges whether the time-saving end condition is satisfied. Here, it is judged that the time-saving end condition is satisfied when the total number of time-saving times reaches 10 times due to the special 1 fluctuation in the advantageous state and the advantageous state transitions to the normal state. If it is judged that the time-saving end condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1430-27, and if it is judged that the time-saving end condition is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1430-17.

(Step S1430-9)
If the current game state is normal (NO in step S1430-1), the sub-CPU 330a judges whether it is the start of the special 1 fluctuation. If it is judged that it is the start of the special 1 fluctuation, the process proceeds to step S1430-11, and if it is judged that it is not the start of the special 1 fluctuation, the process proceeds to step S1430-15.

(Step S1430-11)
The sub-CPU 330a judges whether the special symbol Xa has been won. If it is judged that the special symbol Xa has been won, the process proceeds to step S1430-13. If it is judged that the special symbol Xa has not been won, the process proceeds to step S1430-17.

(Step S1430-13)
The sub-CPU 330a judges whether the special 1 variation is executed within the second time in the non-time-saving game state. If it is judged as a result that the special 1 variation is executed within the second time in the non-time-saving game state, the process proceeds to step S1430-27, and if it is judged that the special 1 variation is not executed within the second time in the non-time-saving game state, the process proceeds to step S1430-17.

(Step S1430-15)
The sub-CPU 330a judges whether it is the start of the special 2 fluctuation in the normal state. If it is judged that it is the start of the special 2 fluctuation, the process proceeds to step S1430-27, and if it is judged that it is not the start of the special 2 fluctuation, the process proceeds to step S1430-17.

(Step S1430-17)
The sub-CPU 330a judges whether or not a special symbol confirmation command has been received when the power is turned on. If it is judged that the special symbol confirmation command has been received, the process proceeds to step S1430-19, and if it is judged that the special symbol confirmation command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S1430-21.

(Step S1430-19)
The sub-CPU 330a judges whether a special symbol confirmation command indicating a big win or a small win has been received. If it is judged that a special symbol confirmation command indicating a big win or a small win has been received, the process proceeds to step S1430-27, and if it is judged that a special symbol confirmation command indicating a big win or a small win has not been received, the process proceeds to step S1430-21.

(Step S1430-21)
The sub-CPU 330a judges whether or not a change command has been received. If it is judged that a change command has been received, the process proceeds to step S1430-23, and if it is judged that a change command has not been received, the state change suggestion presentation control process is terminated.

(Step S1430-23)
The sub-CPU 330a judges whether the received fluctuation command is a fluctuation command for a big win or a small win. As a result, if it is judged that a fluctuation command for a big win or a small win has been received, the process proceeds to step S1430-25, and if it is judged that a fluctuation command for a big win or a small win has not been received, the state change suggestion presentation control process is terminated.

(Step S1430-25)
The sub-CPU 330a judges whether the power is being restored. If it is judged that the power is being restored, the process proceeds to step S1430-27. If it is judged that the power is not being restored, the process ends.

(Step S1430-27)
The sub-CPU 330a executes the status change suggestion presentation and ends the status change suggestion presentation control process.

According to the above-mentioned state change suggestion effect control process, when a jackpot is won with a special 1 change in an advantageous state, and when a special 1 change reaches the total number of time-saving times in an advantageous state, a state change suggestion effect is executed as the display of the changing patterns on the first special pattern display 160 starts, i.e., while the changing patterns on the first special pattern display 160 are being displayed.

In addition, after transitioning to a non-time-saving game state, if the special symbol Xa is won in the first or second special 1 variation and transitions to a C time-saving game state, a state change suggestion effect is executed as the first special symbol display 160 starts to display the varying symbols.

In addition, when a special 2 change starts in the normal state, a state change suggestion effect is executed along with the start of the change in the pattern display on the second special pattern display 162.

In addition, if a power outage occurs while the changing patterns are being displayed when a big or small win is won, and the power is then turned back on, a state change suggestion effect will be executed when the power is turned back on.

In addition, when the power is restored, a lottery for a big win is held, and if a big win or a small win is won, a state change suggestion effect is executed as the display of the changing patterns on the first special pattern display 160 or the second special pattern display 162 starts.

Figure 115 is a flowchart explaining the variable performance control process in the sub-control board 330 in the embodiment.

(Step S1440-1)
The sub-CPU 330a judges whether a fluctuation command has been received. If it is judged that a fluctuation command has been received, the process proceeds to step S1440-3, and if it is judged that a fluctuation command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S1440-11.

(Step S1440-3)
The sub-CPU 330a judges whether the execution condition of the special chart change performance is satisfied. The execution condition of the special chart change performance is a condition that enables the execution of the change performance based on the received change command when the special 1 change starts. For example, the execution condition of the special chart change performance is set as follows: the game state is normal, a change command related to the special 1 change has been received, and when a jackpot is won in a non-time-saving game state, the special 1 change is the third or subsequent time in the non-time-saving game state.

(Step S1440-5)
The sub-CPU 330a determines and stores the execution pattern of the special chart change presentation based on the received change command.

(Step S1440-7)
The sub-CPU 330a performs a special chart change performance execution process for executing the special chart change performance with the execution pattern stored in the above step S1440-5. This causes the change performance to be executed.

(Step S1441)
The sub-CPU 330a executes a process for canceling the waiting state for both customers, which will be described in detail later.

(Step S1442)
The sub-CPU 330a executes a special customer waiting state release process for releasing the special customer waiting state. The special customer waiting state release process will be described in detail later.

(Step S1440-9)
The sub-CPU 330a executes the varying display of the first mini pattern 220.

(Step S1440-11)
The sub-CPU 330a judges whether the normal map fluctuation pattern command has been received. As a result, if it is judged that the normal map fluctuation pattern command has been received, the process proceeds to step S1440-13, and if it is judged that the normal map fluctuation pattern command has not been received, the fluctuation performance control process is terminated.

(Step S1440-13)
The sub-CPU 330a judges whether the execution condition of the normal map variation performance is satisfied. The execution condition of the normal map variation performance is a condition that allows the variation performance to be executed based on the received normal map variation pattern command when the normal map variation starts. The execution condition of the normal map variation performance is, for example, that the game state is in an advantageous state.

(Step S1440-15)
The sub-CPU 330a determines and stores the execution pattern of the normal map fluctuation performance based on the received normal map fluctuation pattern command.

(Step S1440-17)
The sub-CPU 330a performs a normal map variation performance execution process for executing the normal map variation performance with the execution pattern stored in the above step S1440-15. This executes the variation performance.

(Step S1441)
The sub-CPU 330a executes a process for canceling the waiting state for both customers, which will be described in detail later.

(Step S1443)
The sub-CPU 330a executes a process for canceling the waiting state for a regular customer, which will be described in detail later.

(Step S1440-19)
The sub-CPU 330a executes the changing display of the second mini pattern 222 and terminates the changing performance control process.

Figure 116 is a flowchart explaining the process of canceling the waiting state for both passengers on the sub-control board 330 in the embodiment.

(Step S1441-1)
The sub-CPU 330a judges whether it has received either the fluctuation command of the actual fluctuation object or the general fluctuation pattern command of the actual fluctuation object. As a result, if it has received either the fluctuation command of the actual fluctuation object or the general fluctuation pattern command of the actual fluctuation object, it moves the process to step S1441-3, and if it has not received either the fluctuation command of the actual fluctuation object or the general fluctuation pattern command of the actual fluctuation object, it ends the both customer waiting state release process.

(Step S1441-3)
The sub-CPU 330a judges whether the both-customer waiting flag is on. If the both-customer waiting flag is on, the process proceeds to step S1441-5. If the both-customer waiting flag is off, the both-customer waiting state release process is terminated.

(Step S1441-5)
The sub-CPU 330a turns off the both customer waiting flag.

(Step S1441-7)
The sub-CPU 330a judges whether a demo performance is being executed in the main performance display section 200a. If a demo performance is being executed, the process proceeds to step S1441-9. If a demo performance is not being executed, the process for canceling the waiting state for both customers is terminated.

(Step S1441-9)
The sub-CPU 330a ends the execution of the demo performance in the main performance display section 200a, and ends the process of canceling the waiting state for both customers.

Figure 117 is a flowchart explaining the process of canceling the special customer waiting state on the sub-control board 330 in the embodiment.

(Step S1442-1)
The sub-CPU 330a judges whether the special customer waiting flag is on. If the special customer waiting flag is on, the process proceeds to step S1442-3. If the special customer waiting flag is off, the special customer waiting state release process is terminated.

(Step S1442-3)
The sub-CPU 330a turns off the special customer waiting flag and ends the special customer waiting state release process.

Figure 118 is a flowchart explaining the process of canceling the regular passenger waiting state on the sub-control board 330 in the embodiment.

(Step S1443-1)
The sub-CPU 330a judges whether the regular customer waiting flag is on. If the regular customer waiting flag is on, the process proceeds to step S1443-3. If the regular customer waiting flag is off, the regular customer waiting state release process is terminated.

(Step S1443-3)
The sub-CPU 330a turns off the regular customer waiting flag and ends the regular customer waiting state release process.

Figure 119 is a flowchart explaining the customer waiting state setting process in the sub-control board 330 in the embodiment.

(Step S1450-1)
The sub-CPU 330a judges whether the customer waiting command has been received. If the customer waiting command has been received, the process proceeds to step S1450-3. If the customer waiting command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S1450-7. The customer waiting command is set in the special symbol variation waiting process in the main control board 300, and then transmitted to the sub-control board 330 by the sub-command transmission process.

(Step S1450-3)
The sub-CPU 330a determines whether the special customer waiting flag is off. If the special customer waiting flag is off, the process proceeds to step S1450-5. If the special customer waiting flag is on, the process proceeds to step S1450-7.

(Step S1450-5)
The sub-CPU 330a turns on the special customer waiting flag.

(Step S1450-7)
The sub-CPU 330a judges whether a regular customer waiting command has been received. If the regular customer waiting command has been received, the process proceeds to step S1450-9. If the regular customer waiting command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S1450-13. The regular customer waiting command is set in the regular pattern change waiting process in the main control board 300, and then transmitted to the sub-control board 330 by the sub-command transmission process.

(Step S1450-9)
The sub-CPU 330a judges whether the regular customer waiting flag is off. If the regular customer waiting flag is off, the process proceeds to step S1450-11. If the regular customer waiting flag is on, the process proceeds to step S1450-13.

(Step S1450-11)
The sub-CPU 330a turns on the regular customer waiting flag.

(Step S1450-13)
The sub-CPU 330a judges whether the special customer waiting flag is on. If the special customer waiting flag is on, the process proceeds to step S1450-15. If the special customer waiting flag is off, the process ends.

(Step S1450-15)
The sub-CPU 330a judges whether the regular customer waiting flag is on. If the regular customer waiting flag is on, the process proceeds to step S1450-17. If the regular customer waiting flag is off, the process ends.

(Step S1450-17)
The sub-CPU 330a judges whether the both-customer waiting flag is OFF. If the both-customer waiting flag is OFF, the process proceeds to step S1450-19. If the both-customer waiting flag is ON, the customer waiting state setting process is terminated.

(Step S1450-19)
The sub-CPU 330a turns on the both customer waiting flag.

(Step S1450-21)
The sub-CPU 330a sets a predetermined timer value (for example, 60 seconds) in the demo performance start timer.

Figure 120 is a flowchart explaining the demo performance control process in the sub-control board 330 in the embodiment.

(Step S1460-1)
The sub-CPU 330a judges whether the both-customer waiting flag is on. If the both-customer waiting flag is on, the process proceeds to step S1460-3. If the both-customer waiting flag is off, the demo performance control process is terminated.

(Step S1460-3)
The sub-CPU 330a judges whether the timer value of the demo performance start timer is greater than 0. As a result, if it is judged that the timer value is greater than 0, the process proceeds to step S1460-5, and if it is judged that the timer value is not greater than 0, the demo performance control process is terminated.

(Step S1460-5)
The sub-CPU 330a decrements the timer value of the demo performance start timer.

(Step S1460-7)
The sub-CPU 330a judges whether the timer value of the demo performance start timer updated in the above step S1460-5 is 0. As a result, if it is judged that the timer value is 0, the process proceeds to step S1460-9, and if it is judged that the timer value is not 0, the demo performance control process is terminated.

(Step S1460-9)
The sub-CPU 330a performs processing to start the playback of a dedicated demo movie in the main performance display section 200a, and then ends the demo performance control processing.

Although the preferred embodiment of the present invention has been described above with reference to the attached drawings, it goes without saying that the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. It is clear that a person skilled in the art can come up with various modified or revised examples within the scope of the claims, and it is understood that these also naturally fall within the technical scope of the present invention.

In the above embodiment, a big win and a small win are provided, but it is sufficient to provide either a big win or a small win, and the present invention is applicable to so-called first type gaming machines, second type gaming machines, and first and second type mixed machines.

It goes without saying that the above examples are merely examples and can be modified as appropriate.

In the above embodiment, a case where six setting values are set has been described, but setting values do not have to be set, and the number of setting values is not particularly limited. Also, in the above embodiment, the probability of winning the jackpot differs depending on the setting value. However, this is not the only thing that differs depending on the setting value.

In the above embodiment, a case has been described in which the first game area 116a and the second game area 116b are provided on the game board 108 as areas into which game balls can be hit. However, the surface configuration of the game board 108 is not limited to this, and only one game area may be provided.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the number of times the normal map changes is set as the time-saving end condition, but instead of or in addition to the number of times the normal map changes, the number of times the normal power (second start port 122) is operated or the number of times the normal map lottery is won may be set.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the result of the big role lottery based on the special 2 reservation cannot be a miss, but the result of the big role lottery based on the special 2 reservation may also be a miss with a certain probability.

In the above embodiment, a case was described in which multiple game states with different game progress conditions for normal play are provided, but the content of the game states is not particularly limited. In any case, the present invention is broadly applicable to gaming machines in which a game progresses in one of multiple provided states, including a first state and a second state that is more advantageous to the player than the first state.

In addition, the conditions for ending the advantageous state in the above example are merely examples, and can be modified as appropriate.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the same result display screen is displayed in the result presentation regardless of the ending condition under which the advantageous state ends, but different result display screens may be displayed depending on the ending condition as long as they are at least partially common. Note that partially common includes cases where the display format is different but the content communicated to the player is common, and cases where the display format (e.g. font, etc.) of the display objects displayed on the result display screen is common but the content communicated to the player is different.

The main control board 300 in the above embodiment corresponds to the game control means of the present invention.
In the above embodiment, the main CPU 300a which executes the processes of steps S631, S632 and S671 corresponds to the state changing means of the present invention.
In the above embodiment, the sub-CPU 330a that executes the process of step S1420 corresponds to the performance execution means of the present invention.

100 Gaming machine 300 Main control board 300a Main CPU
300b Main ROM
300c Main RAM
330 Sub-control board 330a Sub-CPU
330b Sub ROM
330c Sub RAM

Claims (1)

A gaming machine in which a game progresses in any one of a plurality of states including a first state and a second state which is more advantageous to a player than the first state,
A big prize opening provided in the gaming area;
A prize winning port provided in the game area separately from the big prize winning port;
A game control means for progressing a game in accordance with the progress conditions set in the state;
a state change means for ending the second state when either a preset first end condition or a second end condition different from the first end condition is satisfied in the second state;
an effect execution means for executing a predetermined effect based on a game result during a predetermined period in response to the end of the second state;
Equipped with
The game control means includes:
A normal game including a process of executing a first lottery to determine whether or not a first opening game can be executed, and a process of controlling opening and closing of the winning port to execute the first opening game when the first lottery is won;
A special game including a process of executing a second lottery to determine whether or not a second opening game can be executed, and a process of controlling the opening and closing of the big prize winning port to execute the second opening game when the second lottery is won;
Run
In the second state, the normal game is more advantageous to the player than in the first state,
The first termination condition can be established based on the execution of the normal game,
The second end condition can be established based on execution of the special game,
The predetermined performance is,
A case where the first termination condition is satisfied and a case where the second termination condition is satisfied are at least partially common to each other;
The duration of the performance will be shortened when the preset conditions for ending the performance are met.
The effect end condition includes a common effect end condition when the first end condition is satisfied and when the second end condition is satisfied.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images